Giáo án giảng dạy soạn theo đổi mới Tiếng Anh 6,7 - HKII chương trình cũ (hệ 7 năm) 2 cột 2019-2020

GIÁO ÁN GIẢNG DẠY SOẠN THEO ĐỔI MỚI TIẾNG ANH

vectorstock.com/7952556

Ths Nguyễn Thanh Tú eBook Collection

DẠY KÈM QUY NHƠN LESSON PLAN PHÁT TRIỂN NỘI DUNG

Giáo án giảng dạy soạn theo đổi mới Tiếng Anh 6,7 - HKII chương trình cũ (hệ 7 năm) 2 cột (2019-2020) WORD VERSION | 2021 EDITION ORDER NOW / CHUYỂN GIAO QUA EMAIL TAILIEUCHUANTHAMKHAO@GMAIL.COM

Tài liệu chuẩn tham khảo Phát triển kênh bởi Ths Nguyễn Thanh Tú Đơn vị tài trợ / phát hành / chia sẻ học thuật : Nguyen Thanh Tu Group Hỗ trợ trực tuyến Fb www.facebook.com/DayKemQuyNhon Mobi/Zalo 0905779594

Week: 20 Period: 55

Unit 9: The body Leson 1: A - Parts of the body ( A1 ,2 )

Preparation date: Teaching date :

I. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know the names of parts of the Body and descride the body.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Love family willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around. Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone…

II. PRESENTATION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s & Students’ activities 1. Warm-up Ss: play the game “What’s this”.

T: guide students to play the game 2.Presentation: -TM: Practising, technical present….

-C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident * Pre - teach vocab : -T elicits by using the picture and real things.

Contents

Warm-up Ss: play the game “What’s this”.

T: guide students to play the game

I-Vocabulary : - a head : ®Çu

Ss: Look , listen and say out the words.

-T: Asks and models the words twice and asks ss to listen and repeat chorally, individually.

Ss: Listen and repeat chorally and individually.

T: Write the words on the board, gives meaning and the stress.

- Asks ss to copy down.

Ss:Say again the meaning and stresscopy. * Check vocab: Matching.

-T Puts the picture on the board and asks ss to match Ss: Go to the board and match. * Set the sence: -T gives the picture on p96 and asks: + Who is that ? +Is that a boy or girl ?

Ss: look and asnwer.

3.Practice -TM: Technical present….

-C: Co-operation -Q: Self-made and be responsible for yourself ( picture drill ) -T: Puts the picture on the board.

Ss: look at the picture -T:Models the qs and answer Ss: Look, listen and repeat - T Calls one ss to ptactice with T. Asks the students to practice asking and answering in pairs.

Ss: Practice in pairs T:Call on some pairs to check and correct.

Ss: Point and say the parts of the Body.

-

a shoulder: vai an arm : c¸nh tay a hand : bµn tay a finger : ngãn tay a chest :ngùc a leg : c¼ng ch©n a foot- feet : bµn ch©n a toe: ngãn ch©n

II-Practice: 1. Picture drill Example : What is that ? –That is his head What are those ? – Those are his eyes

2. Your body EX: S1: What is this?

S2: This is my head S1: What are those?

S2: They are my fingers III.FURTHER PRACTICE

- Working in groups to find out the hidden words.

4..FURTHER PRACTICE - Giving the words in two groups by . Wordsquare: - Introduces the word-square & asks Ss circling the words & put them into a to work in groups to find out the 14 present progressive statement & write hidden words. on the board.

– Asks Ss to give the words in two groups by circling the words & put them H E A D O X W T into a present progressive statement & A K L A C T F E write on the board.

T R A V H A O W - Corrects & Comments the game.

F I N G E R O T H D R I S M T O * Answer keys: Q E M A T S T E HEAD; FINGER;SHOULDER O R R H A N D S HANDS; FOOT. S H O U L D E R ARMS; LEGS; CHEST; TOES

5.Production: (pair work) -T Asks ss to work in pairs to ask and answer about the parts of the body of their partner.

Play a game : Simon says Simon says “Touch your head ” Simon says “ Touch your chest ” Simon says “ Touch your feet ” “ Touch your shoulders ” Simon says “Touch your shoulders ” Simon says “ Touch your legs ” “ Touch your head ” “ Touch your shoulders ” Simon says “ Touch your head ” Simon says “Touch your left hand ” Simon says “ Touch your fingers ” “ Touch your left foot ” Simon says “ Touch your left foot ” …………..

Week: 20 Period: 56

Unit 9: the body Lesson 2: A3-5

Preparation date: 2/1 Teaching date : 9/1

Ss: Practice in pairs to ask and answer about their partner’s body -T Calls some pairs to check and correct. *Hold a game : Simon says Ask one to control it Study the vocabulary & example exchange.

- Exercise: A1- P84. Workbook.

- Read the text A3 – P97 at home & prepare the pictures on P97.

I. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use Adj to describe Physical Appearance.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: - Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone. Willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

3.Attitudes: Students love more their subjects 4.Competence: Communication ,language ,write ,speak,read ,listen II. PRESENTATION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III.Teaching methods:

Communicative approach ,picture drill,group work, game ,role play III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s & Students’ activities Contents 1.Warm up Hang man.

- Introduces the symbols & asks Ss to give the letters to form the words.

- Corrects S’s answers & comments.

------- ( fingers) ----- (chest) ---- (arm) ---- (feet) ---- (legs) 2.Presentation: -TM: Practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: - Self-made and confident *Pre - teach vocab : -T elicits by using the pictures Ss: Look, listen and say out the words.

I-Vocabulary : - T Writes the words on the board, gives - tall (adj ) : cao - short (adj ):thÊp meaning and the stress.

- thin ( adj ) :gÇy - T Asks ss to copy down - fat (adj) : mËp Ss: copy.

- heavy (adj ):nÆng => Check vocab : Matching.

- light ( adj ): nhÑ *Set the sence:” Today, we’ll learn how to II-Model sentences: Ex: He is tall describe a person’s appearance” She is short - Holds the picture and asks ss “ How is he?”

I am tall -Read and write the model sentences on the board. * Form: - Elicits and Gives the structure on the board.

- Elicits the form, use, meaning, pronunciation. S + tobe + adjective - Asks ss to copy down Use: -dïng ®Ó m« t¶ ai ®ã.

3.Practice : -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Be responsible for yourself and everyone *Picture drill - Holds the picture A3 and models.

- Asks to look , listen and repeat chorally, individually.

- Calls some ss to check and correct their pronunciation.

4.Futher practice * Listen and choose the right picture.

- holds the pictures A4 and runs through.

- Puts the pictures on the board.

- Plays the tape twice and asks ss to listen and choose the right pictures.

- Calls some ss to check and correct.

- Plays the tape one more to correct. . Grid: With answer keys.

- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to listen to the tape & write the order of the people described.

- Asks Ss to compare & give their information.

- Corrects & Comments S’s information.

5.Production - Asks ss to describe their partners.

- Calls some ss to check and correct - Learn newords by heaart.

- Do exercise 3,4- P84 in the exercise book.

- Prepare: Unit 9: b

III-Practice: 1/ Picture drill: A3/97. a) He is tall b) She is short c) She is thin d) He is fat e) He is heavy f) She is light

2/ Listen: A4/p98. * Answer: 1.d 2.c 3.b

4.a

3/ Describe your friends.

Ex: Hoa is thin . She is tall.

IV.Homework: - Learn newords by heaart.

- Do exercise 3,4- P84 in the exercise book.

- Prepare: Unit 9: B1

Week: 21 Period: 59

Unit 9 (cont) Lesson 5: B4,5.

Preparation date:9/1 Teaching date : 16/1

I. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , Sts will be able to understand the reading about Miss Chi`s appearance.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,‌ - Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: - Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself, live humanty, cooperate with people around,‌ II. PRESENTATION:

1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s & Students’ activities Contents 1.Warm up Picture cues.

- Asks Ss to work in pairs, take it in turn to point at the different picture on page 100-101 & ask and answer. Using the exchange: S1: What’s this color ?

S2: It’s green.

- Corrects & comments.

2.Pre - reading: -TM: Play game, practising -C: Co-operation -Q: - Confident, be responsible for yourself *Matching: -T explains the text to students. ( B5 p102).

-Has them to listen to the first time and take notes.

Ss: Listen and take notes.

-T asks them to listen again and check.

Ss: listen and check.

-T calls on some students to check.

Ss: Give their answers.

-T gives the correct answers.

-gets them to describe their friends.

Ss: Pairwork.

-T calls on some students to check the answers. *Set the sence: -gives the picture about Miss Chi and asks: +who is this? *Gap fill: -T hangs the poster of the gap -fill on the board .

-tells them to copy and guess.

Picture cues.

S1: What’s this color ?

S2: It’s green.

S1: What’s that color ?

S2: It’s red

I- Listening: Matching 1a.He has an oval face and thin lips.

2c.He has a round face.

3b.She has a small face and long hair.

4d.Her hair isn’t long and isn’t short.She has full lips.

II- Reading: 1/ Gap-fill: Miss Chi is (1)………… and thin.She has a (2)…… face, (3)……………….,

Ss: guess

3.while - reading: -TM: Practising, technical present….

-C: Develop self capacity -Q: - Self-made and confident -T asks them to open their book on p101 to read the passage about Miss Chi and complete .

-gives them 3’ -T calls on some students to go to the board and write.

Ss: Write.

-T checks. * Present grammar.

T: Give examples with “ or”.

Ss: Take notes.

- T: Let ss practice the examples.

- Ask ss to give form and use.

(4)……….hair,(5)…………eyes a(6)…………..nose,(7)……….lips and small(8)……….teeth.

*Answer keys: 1.tall 4.black

2.round

3.long

5.brown

7. thin

6.small

8.white

2. C©u hái lùa chän víi tÝnh tõ: - Are Miss Chi`s lips full or thin?

They are full.

- Is your house big or small? My house is big. => Tobe + N(s) + Adj1 + or + Adj2?

S + tobe + Adj1(Adj2).

4.Post - reading: *Comprehension Questions: -asks them to look at the questions on p102 3/Answer: * Lucky number and answer in pairs.

1 2 -gives them 4’.

5 6 -Let ss play: Lucky number.

1. LN 5. Qd a.It’s long 2. Qc 6. LN 3. Qa 7. Qe b.It’s black 4. LN 8. Qb c.They are brown -gives feedback. d.It’s small e.They are full

3 7

4 8

5.Production Rewrite the sentences 1. He has a small round face. -> His face…is small and round……

2. They have white teeth. -> Their teeth…are white....

3. Her hair is long. -> She has…long hair……

4. Nam has full lips. -> Nam’s lips …are full...

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Do exerice III page 51, Do B2 on p.85 (workbook) - Exercise: write a short paragraph to describe people using the survey.

- Prepare the pictures on page 104 & 106.

Preparing date: 07/01/2016 Teaching date: 13/ 01/2016

Week 20

III. Homework : - Learn by heart the new words.

- Do exerice III page 51, Do B2 on p.85 (workbook) - Exercise: write a short paragraph to describe people using the survey.

- Prepare the pictures on page 104 & 106.

UNIT 9: THE BODY Period 57 – Lesson 3: B – Faces(B1)

I/ The objectives: By the end of the lesson , Sts will be able to know the name of parts of the face and describe them.

+ Know colors and use colors to describe things.

1. Knowledge * Vocab : lip , nose , mouth , teeth , eye , ear , oval face , round face …………. * Grammar: Describing sentences: What is it? / What are those?

2. Skills: Intergrated skill 3. Attitude: Students like studying the subject and use English correctly some question words 4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: - Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PRESENTATION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s & Students’ activities Contents 1.Warm-up: * Net work arm - T Gives the topic on the board and runs through Ss: Look at the board and listen how to play Part of - T Divides class into 2 teams, at the body the same time , asks members of 2 teams to fo to the and write the parts of the body within 2 minutes. Which team writes more will be winner.

Ss: Go to the board and write the words in teams - T Checks and comments 2.Presetation -TM: Practising, technical present….

-C: Develop self capacity -Q: - Self-made and confident * Pre - teach vocab : I- Vocabulary:

-T elicits by using the picture - Asks and models the words twice and asks ss to listen and repeat chorally, individually.

- Writes the words on the board, gives meaning and the stress.

- Asks ss to copy down Ss: Listen, repeat, and copy down. => Check vocab : Matching * Set the sence : - Use the picture on p100 and asks them:what is that ?

3.Practice -TM: Practising, technical present….

-C: Develop self capacity -Q: - Self-made and confident * Describe: - T: have ss to look at the pictures/p100 and guess the meaning by matching.

Ss: matching.

-T: Ask Sts to describe people in pictures Ss: pairwork.

- a face: mặt - hair (n) :tóc -an eye :mắt -a nose :mũi -a mouth :miệng -an ear: tai -lips :môi - tooth- teeth(n): răng II- Listen and repeat: B1

* Matching. + oval (a) + round (a) + thin(a): + full(a): + long (a) + short (a)

ngắn tròn trái xoan đầy đặn mỏng dài

*Model sentences T sets the scene and elicits from pictures +What is this?

This is her nose. +What are those?

They are her eyes ( These sentences are used for describing parts of the face ) 4.Futher Practice T uses a poster with the game on it T sets the scene and ask Ss to find the correct word in the word square ( word square ) ( word square )

* Describe: Ex: He has a round face.

She has an oval face.

*word square Ss play the game in whole class H A I R X F N E F A T I E O Y F E N A B S E E G

Hair, fat, see, then, mouth, out, heavy.

Ear, arm, near, toe, to, feet, teeth, fingers.

R T H E T E M O U T H R H E A V Y S Ss work in group or pair and describe themselves and their partner

Nose, eye.

5. Production - Learn newords by heaart.

- Do exercise 1,2- P85 in the exercise book.

- Prepare: Unit 9: B2-3.

Preparing date: 7/01 Teaching date: 14/ 01

Week 21

UNIT 9: THE BODY Period 58:Lesson 4;B – Faces(B2,3)

I.Objectives By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to describe the features 1. Knowledge * Vocab : Black; grey, red, blue, brown, white, yellow * Grammar: Describing sentences: She has an oval face.

2. Skills: Intergrated skill 3. Attitude: Students like studying the subject and use English correctly 4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,‌ - Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: - Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PRESENTATION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s & Students’ activities Contents 1.Warm-up: (5') Yees eyes *Jumble words hair T gives out some jumble words and have Hari Cefa face SS to rearrange Psli lips Call some Ss to write on the board Sone nose Dreshoul shoulder 2.Presentation -TM: Practising, technical present….

-C: Develop self capacity -Q: - Self-made and confident a)Vocabulary T sets the scene from the pictures then elicits Black(adj):màu đen Grey(adj):màu sám Red(adj):màu đỏ Blue(adj):màu xanh Brown(adj):màu nâu White(adj): màu trắng Yellow(adj): màu vàng b)Finding friend ( with answer key ) T sets the scene She has Black brown grey white red

eyes V V V

hair V V V V V

lips

Ss work in group or pair and individual Ss write on the board Ss listen and repeat in chorus and individual *Checking vocabulary (making sentences ) + She has brown eyes + He has black hair + she has oval face

teeth Ss work in group or pair and individual ( one describe and other guess who they are) V

V

Ex:

Yellow blue green

V

c)Dialogue build Hoa

S1: She has black eyes white teeth red lips S2: Is that Huong?

S1: Yes, she is.

Mai

H: I……a new doll.

M: What ……is her hair?

H : It’s……..

M: ……color are….. eyes?

H: They……. brown.

*Model sentences What color is her hair? are his eyes?

It’s black They’re brown

T sets the scene Ss listen and repeat in chorus and individual T drills: T-WC Half-half Open pair Closed pair T calls Ss to fill in the board *Concept check T checks the use, the form, the meaning and the pronunciation * Form: What color is + N ? are + Ns ?

It They

is are

+ color.

3.Practice “ picture drill ” -TM: Practising, technical present….

-C: Develop self capacity * Use: Ask and answer about color -Q: - Self-made and confident T drills: T-WC T runs through all the pictures then elicits Half-half Example exchange: Open pair S1: What color is her ( hair )?

Closed pair S2: It’s ( black ) S1: What color are her ( eyes )?

S2: They’re ( brown ) Whole class 4. Further practice: “ Picture drill ” T runs through all the pictures then elicits and models T drills the pictures

Week: 21 Period:60

Unit 10: Staying healthy Lesson 1:A-How do you feel? (A1,2,5)

Preparation date:12/1 Teaching date :

T - WC Half – half Open pair Closed pair 5. Production: Ask Ss to learn vocabulary and make sentences with them.

I. OBJECTIVES 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about how they feel using adjs of physical state.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: - Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around…

II. PREPARATION 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURE Teacher’s & Students’ activities 1.Warm-up: T: Ask ss : How do you feel now?( in vietnamese) Ss: Answer.

Contents

2.Presentation : -TM: Play game, technical present….

-C: Capacity to use language -Q: - Self-made and confident * Pre - teach vocab : -T elicits by using the picture on p104 and I- Vocabulary: models 2 times.

-hungry (adj) : ®ãi -thirsty (adj) : kh¸t -full (adj) : no -hot (adj) : nãng -cold (adj) : l¹nh -tired (adj) : mÖt mái - (to) want = would like: muèn * Check vocab : - drink(n) : ®å uèng Matching. * Set the sence: II- Grammar: -T gives one picture on p104 and asks How do you feel? them:"C¶m gi¸c cña b¹n Ba nh− thÕ nµo?

I’m thirsty.

-calls on some students to asnwers.

-How does She feel?

- wrirtes the questions on the board.

She is thirsty. => Hỏi ai ®ã c¶m th©ý nh− thÕ nµo 3.Practice: -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: - Self-made, be responsible for yourself and everyone *Word cue drill - T prepares some wordcues drill and sticks them on the board.

-runs through.

-gives them an example and 2’ -models first.

-calls on some pairs to practice.

-checks. *Picture Drill: -T asks ss to look at the picture . Then ask and answer using the pictures.

-Gives them 3’

III-Practice: 1/Wordcues drill hungry thirsty tired full

hot cold

Ex: -How do you feel?

I’m hot 2/ Picture Drill: Ex: -How does he / she feel?

- Calls on some pairs to practice in front of class.

-Give feedback.

He / She is………

-How do they feel?

They are……

4.Further practice: ( Guessing game ) -gives them some words and an example.

-tells them to work in pairs.

-calls on some pairs to practice in front of class.

-checks 5..Production Complete the sentencs 1.Nam/ hungry.

How does Nam feel? – He feels hungry.

2.They/ thirsty.

How do they feel?- They feel thirsty.

3. Lan/ cold.

How does Lan feel?- She feels cold.

4.He/ full.

How does he feel?- He feels full.

- Read the text again.

-Do exercises A1 ,2 ( in workbook) - Prepare: Unit 10: A3,4,5,7.

3/ Make dialogues: Nhan: What`s the matter, Dung?

Dung: I`m cold.

Nhan: What do you want?

Dung: I want a hot drink.

V/ Homework - Read the text again.

-Do exercises A1 ,2 ( in workbook) - Prepare: Unit 10: A3,4,5,7.

-------------------------------o0o-----------------------------năm Kiểm tra ngày tháng ……………………………………………………. …………………………………………………… …………………………………………………….. …………………………………………………….

Week: 22 Period:61

Unit 10: Staying healthy Lesson 1:A-How do you feel? (A3,4,6)

Preparation date:14/1 Teaching date : 21/1/19

I. OBJECTIVES 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read adialogue to recognise Polite offers and Requests with “What would you like?” and “I’d like some / a” 2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: - Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone. Live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARATION 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues

.2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURE Teacher’s & Students’ activities 1.Warm-up: T : Guides Ps to play “ Slap the board ” game Ss : Play hungry

cold

Contents Warm-up: hungry

full

hot

hot tired

tired

cold

full

thirsty

thirsty

2.Pre-reading: -TM: Practising, technical present….

-C: capacity to use language -Q: - Self-made and confident *Pre -teach vocab: T : Asks Ps to remind structures how to ask – I/ New word : answer someone’s feeling - orange(n) : qu¶ cam - juice (n) : n−íc Ðp tr¸i c©y - noodles(n) : m×, phë, bón - (to) like : thÝch - some: mét vµi, mét Ýt Ss : Remind structure - Plays tape T : Introduces words and structure Ps : Listen and write T : Reads words Ps : Listen and repeat - Read it again (in … choral)

II- Listening: Phuong b) Nhan a) Ba f) Huong d)

*Matching: -Shows the picture on p106 on the projector and asks them to listen and match the right names with the pictures.

-plays the tape.

-calls on some students to give the asnwers .

-gives feedback.

III- Reading: *Predict dialogue: -T :Show the dialogue on the projector and 1/ Gap-fill Nam : How do you feel? asks them to copy .

-explains.

Ss: copy the dialogue and fill in the blanks -T calls on some students to go to the board and write.

Ss: go to the board and write 3.While -reading :(A 3 p105) --TM: Play game, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q; Be responsible for yourself and everyone T asks them to open their books on p105, read the dialogue and check their guess.

-gives the 2’ Ss: open books,read the dialogue and check, compare.

-T calls on some students to give answers.

Ss: gives asnwers.

-T corrects.

Lan:I’m(1)……and(2)………… …

Nam : What would you like ?

Lan: I’d like some(3)………

What about you ?

Nam: I’m (4)……….. .I’d like some (5)………

*key: 1.hot 2. thirsty 3.orange juice 4. hungry 5. noodles.

*Ask and answer(A4/106) 2/ Ask and Answer(A4/106) T: Have ss to work in pairs asking and Ex: *How does Ba feel? He feels answering about Ba, Lan ,Nam. tired.

Ss: Pairwork * What would he like?

T: Ask ss to practice in front of the class.

He would like to sit down.

Ss: Ask and answer before class.

IV- Structure : T : Give feedback.

Ex: What would you like?

I `d like some orange juice.

What would Nam like?

He`d like some noodles. => Form:What would + S + like ?

S + would like + N would like to + Vnt *Note: I would like = I’d like * Use: Ask someone`s need. * Complete the sentences.

1. Lan / noodles.

What would Lan like?

Week: 22 Period:62

Unit 10: (cont) Lesson 3:B- Food and drink(B1-3)

4.Post-reading: T: Guess ss to give examples.

T: Ask ss to give form and use.

Ss: Give form and use.

T Give the task for ss to do.

Mapped dialogue: - Introduces the dialogue & helps Ss to read to remember.

Preparation date: 16/1 Teaching date : 23/1

She likes noodles.

2. They/ orange juice.

3.Minh/ a hot drink.

4. Mai/ go to bed.

- Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in groups & in pairs.

- Asks Ss to complete the dialogue.

- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments Ss: Complete the dialogue.

A B ……… feel? ……cold and hungry ……….like? …..some noodles 5.Production - Read the text again.

- Read the dialogue A6/106 and use the clues to make dialogues.

-Do exercises 3 ,4 ( in workbook) - Prepare: Unit 10: B1-3.

V/ Homework:(3') - Read the text again.

- Read the dialogue A6/106 and use the clues to make dialogues.

-Do exercises 3 ,4 ( in workbook) - Prepare: Unit 10: B1-

I. Objectives.

1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , Sts will be able to practice using Some / Any with There is/There are, positive, negative and Y/N questions to tallk about Food and Drink.

- Name some food and drink - Use “some” and “any” 2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone II. PREPARATION 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURE Teacher’s & Students’ activities 1.Warm-up: T has Ss play a game Ss give some kinds of food and drink. */ Networks: Food Drink -rice -a drink -fruit - milk -meat - orange juice -chicken - water -vegetables - cold drink -noodles - …….

2.Presentation -TM: Practising, technical present….

-C: Capacity to use language -Q: - Self-made and confident T : Shows a menu and asks Ps to remark Ps : Remark the content of it - Name the food in the menu T : Introduces words - Reads words Ps : Listen and repeat T : Plays tape Ps : Listen and repeat T : Gives some words and guides Ps how to

Contents food rice

meat Drink

Milk

a drink

I/ New words : - fruit(n): hoa qu¶ - an apple : t¸o - a banana : chuèi - water : n−íc - rice : c¬m - milk : s÷a - meat : thÞt - any: kh«ng Ýt nµo

make a dialogue Ps : Practice in pairs - Practice before class T : Corrects and remarks - Gives the correct answer

3.Practice -TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Be responsible for yourself and everyone T: Asks Ps to look at the pictures in the books and names them Ps : Name the things in the picture T : Guides Ps how to do B1/108.

- Plays tape twice Ps : Listen and match the names with food - Give the answer T : Corrects and remarks - Gives correct answer T : Guides Ps how to practice B1 using structure “ What would you like ? ” Ps : Practice in pairs T : Corrects and remarks

II/ Structure : * What is there to eat / drink ?

There is / are some …… * Is there any + uncountable noun?

Yes , there is some ………

No , there isn’t any …… * Are there any......................?

Yes , there are some ………

No , there aren’t any …… => Note: + Some: ®øng tr−íc c©u kh¼ng ®Þnh + Any : ®øng tr−íc c©u phñ ®Þnh vµ nghi vÊn

III- Practice: 1/ Worcues drill A : I / hot / cold drink B : I / not hot/ hungry/ bread Answer : A : I’m hot .I’d like a cold drink.

What would you like ?

B: I’m not hot. I’m hungry. I’d like a bread

4.Futher practice B3/109 2/ Ask and answer: Picture drill Ask Sts to practice using Some / Any with Example: There is/There are, positive, negative and Y/N - Is there any meat?- Yes, There is some questions to tallk about Food and Drink. chicken.

Example: - Is there any milk? - No, there isn’t any - Is there any meat?- Yes, There is some chicken.milk.

- Is there any milk? - No, there isn’t any milk. - Are there any bananas? - Yes, there - Are there any bananas? - Yes, there are some…are some…

- Are there any oranges?- No, there aren’t - Are there any oranges?- No, there

Week: 22 Period: 63

Unit 10: (cont) Lesson 3:B 4,5

any…

5.Production T: Give exercise and ask ss to do it.

Ss: Do the task.

T: Ask ss to give answer.

SS: Give the answers.

T: Correct.

- Ask ss to write 2 examples by using countable and uncountable ns.

- T corrects their mistakes.

- Ask Sts to study newwords + a/ an / some / any - Do exercises B2,3,4 in the exercie book.

- Prepare: Unit 10: B4,5,6.

Preparation date: 18/1 Teaching date : 25/1 aren’t any…

Exe 1: Fill a,an, some,any Thu: What`s for breakfast?

Mai: There is ......... bread and....... milk.

Thu: Is there ...........meat?

Mai: No, there ..........

Thu: Are there ...........bananas?

Mai:Yes, there are............bananas.

I. OBJECTIVES 1.Knowledge - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use uncountable and plural Food and drink nouns to make Polite Requests “I’d like some…” and Polite Offers ……….What would you like ?

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: - Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARATION 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURE Contents Teacher’s & Students’ activities “Bingo” 1.warm up.

Meat, banana, rice, milk, apple, water, “Bingo” orange, tomatoes, potatoes Play a game.

2.Presentation: -TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: capacity to use language -Q: - Self-made and confident T : Shows the pictures on the board and asks Ps guess their names Ps : Guess T : Ask Ps to name them by English Ps : Name them by English T : Introduces words .

I/ New words : - Reads words - menu : thùc ®¬n Ps : Listen and repeat - chicken : thÞt gµ - Read them (ind …… choral - fish : c¸

- bread : b¸nh m× 3.Practice : -TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: capacity to use language -Q: - Self-made and confident B5/111.

- T sets the scene : Nam : I’m hungry.I’d like some chicken and some rice.

What would you like ?

Mai : I’m not hungry, but I’m thirsty. I’d like some orrange juice. *Concept check : Me What + would + S + like ? ani S + would like + some + N(unc)/ ng Ns (con). : -Form: -Use :Cách đề nghị lịch sự và mời lịch sự.

II/ Listen(B5): Nhan Tuan Huong Mai Meat Fish Chicken Vegetables Fruit Rice Milk Orange juice III/ Listen and repeat. Then practice the dialogue:

1/ What would you like?

S1: I`m hungry. I`d like some chicken and T: Hang the poster on the board and ask ss some rice.What would you like? to guess what they would like.

S2: I`m not hungry, but I`m thirsty. I’d like Ss: Guess. some orange juice.

T: Let ss listen to the tape and check.

Ss: Listen and check.

T : Plays tape B4.

Run through all the pictures cues.

Ps : Listen and repeat - Read the conversation (pairs) - Practice before class T : Corrects * Picture drill T : Guides Ps how to practice B4/110 using structure “ What would you like ? ” Ps : Practice in pairs T : Corrects and remarks

4.Futher practice T has Ss play "chain game" Tguide ss how to play and ask ss to work in 2/ Chain game: Example: groups of four.

S1: I’d like some fish.

Ss: Groupwork.

S2: I’d like some fish and some T: Call some groups to practice. vegetables.

Ss: Practice before class.

S3: I’d like some fish,some vegetables and some orange juice.

5.Production IV.Homework:(3') -T: Ask ss to retell the lesson.

- Ss learn by heart all the new Ss: Answer. words and the question & answer.

Ask and answer using the words given.

-Do exercises part B ( in 1.Lan/ some bananas. workbook) What would Lan like?

She would like some bananas.

2.They/ some meat and some chicken. 3 Minh/ some fish and some rice.

4.She/ some apples and some milk.

- Ss learn by heart all the new words and the question & answer.

-Do exercises part B ( in workbook) - Prepare: Unit 10: C1-5.

-------------------------------o0o-----------------------------Kiểm tra ngày 21 tháng 01 năm ……………………………………………………. …………………………………………………… …………………………………………………….. …………………………………………………….

Week: 23 Period:64

unit 10 staying healthy.

Lesson 5 C. My favorite food. (C1,2,3,4) Test 15P (No 3)

Preparation date:21/1 Teaching date : 28/1

I. OBJECTIVES 1.Knowledge - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to talk about favourite Food and Drink fluently.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: - Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARATION 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURE 1. Test 15 (No 3) Teacher’s & Students’ activities

Contents

2.Presentation: -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

I/ New words : -Q: - Self-made and confident - carrot(n) : cµ rèt - tomato(n) : cµ chua

- lettuce(n) : xµ l¸ch - potato(n) : khoai t©y - bean(n) : ®Ëu - pea(n) : ®Ëu h¹t trßn - cabbage(n) : b¾p c¶i - onion(n) : hµnh - favorite (a): së thÝch

T : Shows the picture and asks Ps to remark Ps : Remarks T : Play tape twice Ps : Listen and give the meaning of words T : Reads words twice Ps : Listen and repeat (in choral ) - Practice in pairs to ask – answer the questions.

- Practice before class T : Corrects and remarks T : Plays tape and ask Ps to listen Ps : Listen T : Introduces words and structures - Plays tape Ps : Listen and write - Practice in pairs to read the dialogue II/ Structure : T : Corrects Ex : What’s your favorite food ?

I like chicken What’s his favorite food ?

He likes fish => Form: What’s your/ her/his favorite food ?

• Concept check : • Meaning : translate into Vietnamese.

• Form : 1, Do/Does + S + like + N ?

- Yes, S + do/does.

– No, S + don’t/doesn’t.

2, Would you like .... ?

- Yes, please.

– No, thanks./ I wouldn’t.

3.Practice : -TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Be responsible for yourself and everyone. * picture drill C1 T: Have ss to use the pictures/112 to ask and answer.

Ss: Pairwork.

3, What + do/does + S + like ?

- S + like(s) + N. *Use:1,Hỏi và trả lời xem ai đó có thích món ăn đồ uống gì hay ko?

2, Diễn tả lời mời 1 cách lịch sự.

3, Hỏi và trả lời ai đó muốn điều gì một cách lịch sự.

III/ Practice : C1- Picture Drill S1: What are thesse?

S2:They’re beans.

What are those?

S1: They’re carrots.

C2- Practice with a partner * Practice: C2 A : What’s your favorite food , B ?

T : Guides Ps how to practice C2 Ex : What’s your favorite food ?

B : I like fish I like tomatoes A : Do you like vegetables ?

Do you like lettuces ?

B : Yes , I do Yes , I do / No I don’t A : Do you like carrots ?

Ps : Practice in pairs.

B : No , I do not . I like peas and beans * Listen and repeat: C3 C3- Matching: - Ask Sts to read the dialogue 4 ( P 113 ) and - lemonade : n−íc chanh make similar ones .

- iced tea : trµ ®¸ Ss: Practice.

- iced coffee : cµ phª ®¸ - soda : n−íc s«-®a 4.Futher practice : * Word cues drill - Run through all the cues.

C4 : Practice in pairs beans peas carrots Eg : A : Do you like cold drinks ? lettuce oranges rice B : Yes , I do - Ask ss to practice in exchange: A : What do you like ?

Example exchange : B : I like iced tea . It’s my favorite S1: Do you like [beans] ? drink .

S2: Yes, I do.

S3: Would you like some [beans] now?

S4: No, thanks / Yes, please.

IV/ Homework:(3') 5.Production: - Learn by heart words and Ask Sts to make sentences using the structures structure in Remember - Do exercises C in the 1.Hoa’s favourite food / chicken. workbook.

What is Hoa’s favourite food?

- Prepare: Unit 11: A1.

She likes chicken.

2.Lan’s favourite drink / apple juice.

3.His favourite drink/ lemonade.

4. Her favourite food/ tomatoes and carrots.

- Learn by heart words and structures - Do exercises C in the workbook.

- Prepare: Unit 11: A1.

TEST 15’ Read the passage carefully then answer whether the following statements are true (T) or false (F).

Chi is a teacher. She is tall and thin. But she is not weak. She is strong. She has an oval face and brown eyes. She has long black hair.

Chi is having dinner now. She is eating vegetables. She often has vegetables, and fish for dinner. After dinner she eats bananas. Then she drinks a glass of lemon juice. It is her favorite drink.

1. Chi is a teacher.

2. She is tall and fat.

3. She is weak.

4. Her face is oval.

5.She has blue eyes.

6. She is having dinner now.

7. She is eating fish.

8. She eats apples after dinner.

9. Her favorite drink is orange juice.

10. She often has vegetables, and fish for lunch.

Sentence 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

----------THE END--------KEY:

Key

Week: 23 Period: 65

Sentence 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Unit 11: what do you eat?

Lesson 1:A- At the store (A1)

Preparation date:23/1 Teaching date : 30/1

Key T F F T F T F F F F

I. OBJECTIVES 1.Knowledge - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to understand the way to talk about people buy at the store well.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.Love family, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARATION 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues

.2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURE Teacher’s & Students’ activities 1.warm up.

Noughts and crosses - Play a game: Noughts and crosses.

T. draws a table with words in the lesson.

- Divides class into two teams. One team is Noughts(O) and the other is Crosses(X).

- Two teams choose the words in th eboxes in turns. Then use the words in the last lesson. If the sentence is correct, they will get two marks.

- The team which has 3 noughts or 3 crosses on a line will win the game.

2.Presentation -TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident T : Asks Ps to look at the pictures and guess the meaning .

Ps : Look at the pictures and give the meaning of words T : Introduces words - Read words twice Ps : Listen and write - Repeat after teacher (ind …… choral ) T : Explains how to join the words of weight with other nouns - Guides Ps to play “ matching ” Ps : Play

Contents Play Noughts and crosses.

1 2 feel thirsty 6 5 cold would like 7 8 hungry tired

T : Introduces structure - Guides Ps to practice .

II/ Structures : * Lêi ®Ò nghÞ gióp ®ì ai Can I help you ? * Lêi ®Ò nghÞ khi mua hµng A bottle of cooking oil, please.

I`d like a bottle of cooking oil.

I want a bottle of cooking oil.

3.Practice :

3 full 4 noodle 9 hot

S1: How does Ba feel ?

S2: I feel hot .

S1: What does he want ?

S2: He wants some cold drink.

I/ New words : -a bottle of cooking oil:1 chai dÇu ¨n -a packet of tea :1 gãi chÌ -a box of chocolates: 1 hép s« c« la -a kilo of rice :1 kg g¹o -a gram of beef : 1 gam thÞt bß -a dozen of eggs:1 t¸ trøng -a can of peas: 1 lon ®Ëu -a bar of soap:1 thái xµ phßng -a tube of toothpaste:1 tuýt kem ®¸nh r¨ng

-TM: Practising, play game, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Be responsible for yourself and everyone. */ Set the scene : They are at the store . The woman wants to buy something .The shopkeeper says : Can I help you ?

T: Ask Sts to listen and repeat the dialogue then make new ones .

Ss: pairwork.

T: Ask Sts to work in close pairs first then open pairs to check .

Ss: Work in pairs.

T : Guides Ps how to practice using structure have just learnt.

4.Futher practice Hold a game : Noughts and crosses Chocolates A bottle A kilo Tea

Peas

A box

A dozen

Toothpaste

Rice

5.Production Ask ss to fill in the blanks.

1. She would like a …… of chocolates.

2. I want a ……….. of tea.

3. Hoa would like a dozen……..

4. He wants a tube of …………

III/ Practice :

1- Pictures drill Ex : A: Can I help you ?

B: Yes .A packet of tea, please.

A: Here you are.

B: Thank you.

2- Noughts and crosses Chocolates A bottle A kilo Tea

Peas

A box

A dozen

Toothpaste

Rice

Ex: S1: Can I help you?

S2: Yes. A box of chocolates, please.

S1: Here you are.

S2: Thank you.

IV.Doing Ask ss to fill in the blanks.

1. She would like a …box…… of chocolates.

2. I want a …packet…….. of tea.

3. Hoa would like a dozen…eggs……..

4. He wants a tube of ……toothpaste……

5. Mai wants a…bottle……... of cooking oil.

V/ Homework: - Learn by heart new words and structures - Do exercise A1,2 in the exercise books.

- Prepare: Unit 11: A2.

Week: 23 Period:66

Unit 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT? Lesson 2: A2

Preparation date: 25/1 Teaching date : 1/2

5. Mai wants a………... of cooking oil.

- Learn by heart new words and structures - Do exercise A1,2 in the exercise books.

- Prepare: Unit 11: A2.

I. OBJECTIVES 1.Knowledge - By the end of the lesson ss will be able to understand the way to talk about people buy at the store well.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone. II. PREPARATION 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURE Teacher’s & Students’ activities

Contents

1. warm up.

Play “ Pelmanismn”

Play “ Pelmanismn” with words have learn.

T. sticks the cards on the board and Sts play in team.

Two groups choose cards( each group chooses 2 cards ). If they are the same will get mark.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Answer key (1,3) (2,6)

2.Pre - reading -TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made be responsible for yourself and everyone Use a picture ( P 116 ) to set the scene Where are they ?

What are they doing ?

What food can you see ?

What does the boy need ? */ Pre – teach vocab I/ New words :

a bar of a kilo of chocolate peas a bottleof meat eggs soda a dozen a can (10,4)

(5,8)

(9,7)

T: present some newwords Ss: Listen, repeat and copy down.

T: Ask ss to practice the newwords.

Ss: Practice individually,and in chorus.

T: Let ss predict the gap-fill.

Ss: Guess

- Sales girl : C« b¸n hµng - need: cÇn - Anything else: vËt g×, viÖc g× kh¸c - how many + DTDD - how much + DTKDD II- Listen and read: 1/ Predict the dialogue: Salesgirl: Can I help you?

Ba: Yes.I’d like some (1)…,please.

Salesgirl: How much do you want?

Ba: (2)…..grams,please.

Salesgirl: Is there any thing else?

Ba: Yes.I need some(3)…..

Salesgirl: How many do you want?

Ba: (4)…..,please. * Answer key: 1. beef 2. two hundred 3. eggs 4. A dozen

3.While - reading -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident -Have ss read the dialogue and do gap-fill.

- Check the answers.

T: Ask Sts to read the dialogue and answer the questions ( P 116 ) Ss: pairwork.

T: Call ss to give the answers.

Ss: Give the answers.

Give feedback 4.Post - reading T : Introduces words and structures Ps : Write

2/ Asnwer: A 2 p116 a. Ba is in the store. b.He wants some beef and some eggs. c.He wants 200grams of beef. d. He wants a dozen eggs.

III-Strucsture: How much…./ How many …?

Eg1: How much rice do you want ? does she want?

Two kilos Eg2: How many eggs do you need ? does he need?

Week: 24 Period: 67

Unit 11: WHAT DO YOU EAT? Lesson 3: A3,4

T : Reads words Ps : Repeat after teacher - Reread them again (choral – ind ) T : Gives some words and make a model Ps : Practice in pairs (ask – answer )

Preparation date: 28/1 Teaching date : 5/2

A dozen => Form: How many + N(DD) + do/does+S...?

How much + N(KDD) *Note: - DTDD lµ nh÷ng danh tõ cã 2 d¹ng: sè Ýt vµ sè nhiÒu - DTKDD lu«n ë sè Ýt, kh«ng dïng víi a/an. * Wordcues: a- Lan/ oranges/ a dozen.

Ex: How many oranges does Lan want?

She wants a dozen. b- They/ tomatoes/ six. c- Minh/ water/ a bottle.

V/ Homework: 5.Production -Learn by heart modle sentences.

Complete sentences.

-Practice again the dialogue.

1. How much/ milk/ they/ want? – They/ - Do exercise A2,3,4/ p123,124 in two bottles. workbook.

-> How much milk do they want? They -Prepare: A 3- 4 want two bottles.

2. How much/ chicken/ he/ want? He/ five grams.

-> How much chicken does he want? He wants five grams.

3. How many/ apple/ Hoa/ need? – She/ four.

How many apples does Hoa need? She needs four.

4. How many/ tomato/ Minh/ need? He/ six.

How many tomatoes does Minh need? He needs six.

-Learn by heart modle sentences.

-Practice again the dialogue.

- Do exercise A2,3,4/ p123,124 in workbook.

-Prepare: A 3- 4 -------------------------------o0o------------------------------

I. OBJECTIVES 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , Sts will be able to able to practice using How much , how many to ask and answer about the things they want to buy at the store and make a shopping list.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone Love family and country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARATION 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURE Teacher’s & Students’ activities Contents Play slap the board.

1. warm up.

Sts play a game: slap the board bread T. put the words on the board. bottle - Divides class into two teams. (4 sts each) to the front of the class standing at an equal distance from the black board. milk - call out one of the words in Vietnamese . chocolate - Two sts must run forwards and slap the correct word. The st who slaps first is the winner.

- Go on with the next two sts.

2.Pre- reading -TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible

rice

orange

peas

for yourself and everyone Love family, friends and country */ Pre - teach vocab - T. reads the dialogue first.

Sts listen and find out the new words.

- T. reads new words and asks to repeat

I/ Newwords: -Half a kilo : nöa c©n -Half a dozen : nöa t¸ - one kilo : 1kg - two kilos: 2kg * A3. Listen. Match the names of the people II/ Listen: with the things they want.

- Read the text twice.

Phuong- d - Ask Ss to compare the answers with a Ly- e, a partner.

Mai- b - Call some Ss to present the answers in front Nam- c of the class.

- Comment and give the correct answers. */ Set the scene : Nam’s Mom wants him to buy ST for her . Let’s guess 4 things she needs 3.While - reading TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Be responsible for yourself and everyone III/ Read: * Writing shopping list.

1- Shopping list T: Ask Sts to read the dialogue and write a A bottle of cooking oil shopping list.

2 kilos of rice Ss: Practice the dialogue.

Half a kilo of beef T: Have ss write the shopping list. half a dozen oranges Ss: Write.

T: Call ss to give the answers.

Ss: Write their answers. * Questions and answers.

2- Answer the questions T: Ask Sts to practice reading the dialogue a- How much cokking oil does she again and answerr the questions ( T gives the want? questions) => She wants a bottle of cooking oil.

Ss: Answer the questions in pairs. b- How much rice does she want?

T: Call ss to ask and answer. => She wants 2 kilos of rice Ss: Ask and answer before class. c- How much beef does she want?

T: Check and correct. => She wants half a kilo of beef d- How many oranges does she want?

4.Post - reading T: Explain the structure: Can you go to the store for me?

Yes, What do you need? * Make dialogues ( Class 6A) T:Ask Sts to make a shopping list and make similar dialogues Ss: Make dialogues in pairs.

T: Call some pairs to practice.

Ss: Make dialogues in front of the class.

Ss: Listen and take notes. * Wordcues ( Class 6B-C-D)

=> She wants half a dozen oranges.

3- Make dialogues Eg : Mom : Can you go to the store for me ?

You : Yes , Mom . What do you need ?

Mom : A kilo of meat and some potatoes.

You : How many potatoes do you want ?

Mom : Two kilos . And I need half a kilo of chicken and some fish.

You : How much fish do you need, Mom ?

Mom : Half a kilo , please .

5.Production V. Homework : T. calls 1 student to retell content of the lesson : “How much...?” and “How many...?” - Learn by heart the new words.

- Do exercise III page 60 with want and need to talk about quantities - Do exercise 5 – workbook for food shopping.

- Prepare the picture on page 74.

- Learn by heart the new words.

- Do exercise III page 60 - Do exercise 5 – workbook - Prepare the picture on page 74.

Week: 24 Period: 68

Unit 11: (cont) Lesson 4:B- At the canteen(B1,3,4)

Preparation date: 1/2 Teaching date : 9/2

I. OBJECTIVES 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , Sts will be able to able to have further practice in offers and requests for food and drink .

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone Love country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARATION 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURE Teacher’s & Students’ activities Contents 1.Warm-up: Make question then answer: 1. tea / he want / 3 packets 2. rice / Lan want / a kilo 3. chocolate / you want / three boxes * Answer: 1. How much tea does he want?

warm-up: Make question then answer: 1. tea / he want / 3 packets 2. rice / Lan want / a kilo 3. chocolate / you want / three boxes * Answer: 1. How much tea does he want?

He wants 3 packets.

2. How much rice does Lan want?

She wants a kilo.

3. How many chocolates do you want?

I want three boxes.

2.Pre -speaking -TM: Play game -C: Co-operation -Q: Self-made and confident Hold a game : Kim’s game T:Ask Sts to name each item in the picture .

What is this ?

What are these ?

Is this rice ? …………..

Ss: Write the items.

T: Call ss to write. Devide ss into two teams and ask them to write on the board.

Ss: write on the board.

T: check the answers.

3.While - speaking -TM: Practising, discussion group, pairwork, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Love family, friends T: Ask Sts to practice using wordcues ( extra- board) - breakfast/ bread / milk - lunch/ noodles / water - dinner/ rice / orange juice - lunch/ fish / soda - lunch/ chicken / iced tea - dinner/ beef / vegetables Ss: pairwork.

T: Ask Sts to take turn to make dialogues and speak in front of the class .

Ss: pairwork.

He wants 3 packets.

2. How much rice does Lan want?

She wants a kilo.

3. How many chocolates do you want?

I want three boxes.

I/ Food and drink a. some rice b. a bowl of noodles c. some beef d. some chicken e. a fish f. vegetables g. oranges h. bananas i. orange juice j . milk k . a can of soda l . a bottle of water

II/ Speaking: Wordcue Drill - breakfast/ bread / milk - lunch/ noodles / water - dinner/ rice / orange juice - lunch/ fish / soda - lunch/ chicken / iced tea - dinner/ beef / vegetables Eg : What would you like for breakfast ?

I’d like ……….

What would you like for lunch ?

I’d like ………

What would you like for dinner ?

I’d like ……………….

4.Post - speaking T: Ask Sts to look at the pictures P 119 again and then listen to number the pictures as you hear Ss: Look at the pictures again.

T: Ask Sts to listen to the tape twice and number Ss: Listen and number. => Give feed back

III/Listening: Listen and number the pictures

Key : e–b–i–c–f–j–h–l Fish Noodles Orange juice Beef Vegetables Milk Bananas Water 5.Production V/ Homework: Missing letters ( extra- board) 1. I would like some n_ _ _ _es for bre_ - Reread words and structure and learn them by heart. _ _ _st. noodles, breakfast - Do exercise 1- p126 in the workbook.

2. She wa_ _ _ some ri_ _ and some -Prepare: B2,5. ch_ _ _en for lunch. wants, rice, chicken 3. Lan w_ _ _d like some b_ _f and some fi_ _ for dinner. would, beef, fish 4. They would like some m_ _t and some po_ _ _oes for lunch. meat, potatoes - Reread words and structure and learn them by heart.

- Do exercise 1- p126 in the workbook.

-Prepare: B2,5

Week: 24 Period: 69

Unit 11: (cont) Lesson 5:B- At the canteen(B2,5)

Preparation date: 1/2 Teaching date : 9/2

I. OBJECTIVES 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , Sts will be able to able to ask and answer about prices of food and drink 2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Love family and willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around, Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone …

II. PREPARATION 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURE

Teacher’s & Students’ activities 1. warm up.

Play: Word square.

Ask sts to find out the drink and food words.

- Divide the class into 2 groups.

- Ask sts to go to the board and circle the word the find.

- the team which circles more words will win the game.

Contents Word square C H I M W F X R I P M S O C H P E A T I B Answer key -> chicken -> soda -> rice -> peas

2.Presentation -TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident */ Present vocab T:Ask Sts to practice saying the number .

Ss: practice the numbers.

T: Present newwords Ss: Listen, repeat, and copy down.

Practice vocab by matching

C L C O N S M

K Z E D G T S

E Y W A T E R

N O O D L E M

noodle fish water milk

I/ New words: - Sandwich : b¸nh m× x¨ng-uýt - Glass : ly, cèc - fried rice : c¬m rang - bowl : b¸t, chÐn - cake = cookies : b¸nh ngät - ice cream : kem - thousand (n): ngh×n * Present grammar II/ Structure : T: Present the dialogue by setting the scene Ex: : Lan is at the store . She wants to buy some How much is a sandwich ? food and drink .

It is 1,500 dong Ask Sts to listen and read the dialogue How much are two sandwichs ?

Ss: listen. Then read the dialogue.

They are 3.000 dong T: Ask Sts to find out the question and answer about price . => Form: How much + is/are + n?

Ss: find out the question and answer about It is/ They are........... price .

3.Practice -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Be responsible for yourself and everyone * Picture drill T: Ask Sts to practice asking and answering about the price of the things P 121 Ss: Pairwork.

T:Ask some pairs ask and answer before the class .

Ss: Practice before class.

=> Use:Ask and answer about price.

III/ Practice: 1- Picture drill How much is a fried rice ?

It is 2,500 dong How much is a bowl of noodles ?

It is 3,000 dong How much is a sandwich ?

It is 1, 500 dong ....................................

4.Futher practice * wordcue drill T: Have ss make questions and answers for 2- Wordcues a. two cakes/ 1.000d the words given.

How much are two cakes?

Ss: pairwork.

They are 1.000d. b. three pens/ 9.000d How much are three pens?

They are 9.000d. c. a kilo of meat/ 80.000d d. a dozen eggs/ 32.000d e. six tomatoes/ 7.000d * Survey 3- Make a survey T:Ask Sts to fill in the survey.

Ss: Make a survey.

How much is/are Price …?

Price How much is/are …?

A fired rice ?

20 .000 A fired rice ?

20 .000 A can of soda ?

6 .000 A can of soda ?

6 .000 ……….. ………..

5.Production : Chain game + T. asks sts to play Chain game : * Example : S1 : I’d like some fish.

S2 : I’d like some fish and some rice.

V/ Homework: - Reread words and structure and learn them by heart.

- Do exercises part B in the workbook.

Week: 25 Period: 70

Grammar Practice

S3 : I’d like some fish , some rice and a soda....etc.

- Reread words and structure and learn them by heart.

- Do exercises part B in the workbook.

-Prepare: Grammar practice.

Preparation date: 4/2 Teaching date : 12/2 -Prepare: Grammar practice.

-------------------------------o0o-----------------------------Kiểm tra ngày tháng năm ……………………………………………………. …………………………………………………… …………………………………………………….. …………………………………………………….

I. OBJECTIVES 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , Sts will be able to able to practice vocab and structures they have learnt from Unit 9 – Unit 11 - Ask and answer about parts of the body

- Ask and answer about color - Ask and answer about price - Ask and answer abut quantity 2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARATION 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURE Teacher’s & Students’ activities 1.Warm- up: T. calls 1 student to do exe 2 page 61 * The answer: Depend on students’ answer * Ask and answer the prices : a,a bowl of noodles / 3,000d b, a fried rice / 2,500d * Key: a,How much is a bowl of noodles ?

– It’s 3,000d. b, How much is a fried rice ? – It’s 2,500d - T corrects and gives them marks.

2.Presentation -TM: Discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident Likes and Dislikes: Simple present tense: G.P1 p.122.

Contents Warm - up: do exe 2 page 61 * The answer: Depend on students’ answer * Ask and answer the prices : a,a bowl of noodles / 3,000d b, a fried rice / 2,500d * Key: a,How much is a bowl of noodles ? – It’s 3,000 b, How much is a fried rice ?

– It’s 2,500d - T corrects and gives them marks.

I.Tenses * Present simple: S + Vs/Ves……

+ T. asks sts to retell form and use of the S.P tense: + T. hangs up the poster: Find someone who... ... likes fish ... doesn’t like chicken ... likes bread ... doesn’t like rice ... likes milk ... doesn’t like soda ... doesn’t like vegetables + T. asks sts to play “ Find someone who ” game : + T. gets feedback * Gap-fill : T. asks sts to do exe : * Key: a,any / any / some / an */b, any / some */c, any / some / a

Ex:She like fish/ She doesn’t like fish./ Does she like fish? * Present progressive: S + be + V-ing….

Ex: She is singing a song.

Ex1: a. like ; like ; Do / like ; I don’t like b. does / like ; like ; does / like ; doesn’t like Ex5: a. is eating b. are drinking c. is riding d. is going e. is getting f. is travelling

II. A, an, some, any + a: tr−íc N Ýt b¾t ®Çu b»ng phô ©m: a pen, a banana................. + an: tr−íc N Ýt b¾t ®Çu b»ng nguyªn ©m: an apple, an orange.... + some: tr−íc N nhiÒu ®Õm ®−îc vµ Nk®® dïng trong c©u kh¼ng ®Þnh: some potatoes, some water........ +any: dïng trong c©u hái vµ c©u phñ ®Þnh.

3.Practice -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone Grammar practice 2 p.122: a/ an/ some/ Exe 2/122 a. any ; any ; some ; an any : b. any ; some * Networks : + T. asks sts to give the vocabulary in Food c. any ; some ; a or Drink a an a sandwich an orange some noodles a banana an ice cream some fish ..... ...... ...... * Guessing game :

+ T. asks sts to make a sentence - Example : I’d like ........................ + T. asks sts play guessing game 4.Futher practice . Adjectives : Pelmanism : Grammar practice 3 p.122 + T. asks sts to play game into 2 teams. + T. controls the time. tall short long short hot cold

III. Adjectives: tall, short, fat, thin, strong, weak........

- VÞ trÝ: sau "tobe" vµ tr−íc N. Exe 3/ 122 fat a. a short b. thin c. light d. strong heavy light weak e. full f. cold g. thin h. long IV. Grammar practice 4 p.123: Question IV.Questions - Mµu s¾c: What color is/ are.........? words : - C¶m gi¸c: How do/does + S + * Matching : T. asks sts to match : feel?............

Who What How Where - Nhu cÇu: What would + S + like?......... *Key: a, Who /b,What /c,How What do/does +S+ want? S + /d,What /e,Where want(s)…..

- Is there any + danh tu ko dem dc?..........

- Are there any + danh tu dem dc? .............

- Së thÝch: What's your/his/her favorite food/ drink?

- Sè l−îng: How much /How many .............

- Gi¸ c¶: How much is/ are …?

V. Grammar practice 5 p.123:Contrast : * Present Progressive tense , Simple Present + T. asks sts to retell form and use of the two tenses . + T. gets sts do exercise in pairs. * Key: a, is eating b, are drinking c, is riding d, is going e, is getting f, is traveling.

Exe 4/ 123: a. who b. what c. how d. what e. where Supply the correct forms of verbs. a, He (watch) .......... television every day. b, I (want)……….. an orange. c, She would like ( eat) …….some fish and some rice. d, They (play)………. soccer now. e, They need ( buy) a kilo of tomatoes. f, Nam ( not want)….. a bottle of milk.

g, ..........she (like) .......... bananas?

5.Production Quantifiers : Lucky numbers : + T. asks sts to play game into 2 teams.

1.What does cooking oil come in ?

2. What does tea come in ?

3. What does soap come in ?

4. Lucky number 5. What does soda come in ?

6. Lucky number 7. What does iced tea come in ?

8. What do chocolates come in ?

9. What do noodles come in ?

10. What does water come in ?

11. Lucky number 12. What does toothpaste come in ?

week:25 Period:71

Preparing date: 13/2/19 Teaching date: 20/2/19 written test N3

I. OBJECTIVES 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to check themselves and do the tests better 2. Skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing 3. Attitude: - Students should revise the old lessons 4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, capacity to use language - Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone. sensitive and responsible II. PREPARATIONS: 1.Teacher: copied papers, laptop 2.Students: pens III. MATRIX:

IV. TEST: PART I : LISTEN 1.Listen to the chant about Miss Chi carefully then decide whether the following sentences are true or false.(1 pt) 1. Miss Chi isn’t tall and thin.

2. She has long black hair.

3. She has small nose.

4. She has big white teeth.

2. Listen to the chant about Miss Chi again then choose the best answer(1pt) 5. She has a round ………….

A. face B. lip C. ear 6. She has …………. eyes.

A. black B. brown C. blue 7. She has …………. nose.

A. big 8. She has …………. lips.

A. full

B. small

C. tall

B.thin

C. lovely

PART II: GRAMMAR AND VOCAB 1. Choose one word that does not belong in each list.(1pt) 9. A.water B.noodles C.soda D.milk 10. A.fish B.carrot C.cabbage D.lettuce 11. A.head B.happy C.hand D.hair 12. A.blue B.brown C.black D.big 2. Circle the best option A, B, C or D to complete each of the following sentences (2pts).

13. What ………..you like?

A. will

B. would

C. does

D. do

14. Lan is very hungry. She wants some …………….

A. ice- cream B . coffee C. noodles 15. Are you a teacher……an engineer?

A. and B. but C. or 16. ……..are they ? They are pencils.

A Who B . How C. What 17. I love fruit. I like……very much.

A. carrots B. peas C. apples 18. What ….your favorite food?

A. do B. is C . are 19. ......... I help you? – yes, I’d like some oranges please.

A .Do B .Am C. Can 20. How …...milk do you need?

A . many B . much C. any PART IV: READ 1.Read the passage and tick ( ) True or False. (1p

D. lemonade D. so D. Where D. onions D. does D. Must D. some

Chi is a teacher. She is tall and thin. But she is not weak. She is strong. She has an oval face and brown eyes. She has long black hair.

Chi is having dinner now. She is eating vegetables. She often has vegetables, and fish for dinner. After dinner she eats bananas. Then she drinks a glass of lemon juice. It is her favorite drink.

21. Chi is a teacher.

22. She is tall and fat.

23. Her face is oval.

24. Her favorite drink is orange juice.

2.Read the passage and choose the best answer A, B, C for each gap.(1pt) Amanda is 21 years old. She has fair hair and blue (25).... . She has (26).... . brothers, William and Philip, but she (27) ..... have any sisters. Her brothers have brown hair and brown eyes. One of her brothers, Philip, is married and (28) .... two children so she is an uncle.

25. A. ears B. eyes C. nose D. lips 26. A. one B. two C. three D. four 27. A. don’t B. do C. doesn’t D. does 28.A. have B. has C. hasn’t D. haven’t PART IV: WRITE 1.Put the words in good order to make meaningful sentences.(1pt) 29. Hoa / chicken / meat / or / like / does ?

30.traveling / now / bus / their / are / children / by.

31. Lan’s / drink / apple juice / favorite / is.

32.face / has / Nga / oval / an.

2. Write about 40 – 50 words to describe your mother ( or your teacher) ----------THE END--------V- KEY: 1. 0,25 p for each correct sentences

Week: 25 Period: 72

Unit 12 : sports and pastimes Preparation date:15/2 Lesson 1: A- What are they doing ?(A1-5) Teaching date : 22/2

Sentence

Key

Sentence

Key

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

F T T F A B B A B A B D B C

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

C C C B C B T F T F B B C B

WRITE: 1. 0,25 p for each correct sentences 29.Does Hoa like chicken or meat?

30.Their children are traveling by bus now.

31.Lan’s favorite drink is apple juice .

32. Nga has an oval face.

2.Write at least five sentences about yourself: 0.4 p for each correct sentences (Tape: Unit 9-A4) (Mã đề 2 – đảo xáo trộn các câu) VI. PRODUCTION: - Ask Sts to do the exercises in the exercise book.

- Prepare for the next period.

---------------------- o0o ---------------------

I. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, students will be able to further practice in present progressive and sports vocabulary to talk about what people doing now.

Students will be able to talk about the sports they are doing.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III.Procedure Teacher’s and students’ activities Content 1. Warm up.(5,) I.Warm up.

“Jumbled words” “Jumbled words” - Give instruction and check - Have Ss work in teams. * Answer keys: - torsp = - sport - bolfatol = - football - belvalyllo = - volleyball - mage = - game - lietoseniv = - television - Control and get feedback.

2. Presentation. (10’) -TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and be responsible for

yourself and everyone.

- Look at the pictures and guess the meaning of the words.

II.Vocabulary a. Pre teach - Elicit the words from the pictures.

- (to) swim - (to) play badminton.

- (to) play table tennis - (to) do aerobics - (to) skip - (to) jog * Checking: Rub out and remember. b. Presentation text. (A1.P. 124) - Show the pictures and ask: What is he doing? or What are they doing?

- Ask Ss to remind the form and use of the present progressive tense.

- Have Ss give examples.

(to) swim : b¬i - (to) skip : nh¶y d©y - (to) jog : ®i bé - (to) play badminton : ch¬i cÇu l«ng - (to) play table tennis : ch¬i bãng bµn - (to) do aerobics : tËp thÓ dôc nhÞp ®iÖu - Look at the pictures and answer.

He is swimming They are playing volleyball

- Remind: (+) S + be + V-ing..

(-) S + be not + V-ing.. (?) Be + S + V-ing..?

Yes / No

- Give examples.

Eg: I am watching TV - Listen and repeat - Role play to practice.

- Work in pairs to practice S1: What is she doing?

S2: She is skipping 3. Practice. (5’) -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident - Ask students to listen to the radio and repeat. * A2. 125. “Picture drill” A2 . Ask and answer - Ask Ss to work in pairs to ask and answer

about the pictures on page 124 , using the questio Lan Nam ns in A2.P 125.

- Model with a good student.

T: What is he doing? (show the picture 1) S: He is swimming - Have Ss work in closed pairs and open pairs - Call on some pairs to practice before the class.

- Give feedback

What is he doing ?

He is swimming What is she doing ?

She is doing aerobics What are they doing ?

They are playing soccer

4. Further practice. (6’) “Noughts and crosses” - Listen and answer - Give instruction and check - Work in teams - Have Ss work in teams to ask and answer Eg: S1. choose. “Picture c” using the present progressive tense.

S2. What are they doing?

S1. They are playing soccer Picture c Picture a Picture b Picture f Picture d Picture e A4 . Read then answer the Picture h Picture g Picture i questions - Control and give feedback. * Complete the table: Nam Lan - swims - plays soccer ..................... .................

Pre reading. (7’) -TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Love family, friends and country - Introduce the situation and have Ss done an * Answer: exercise. a. She swims, does aerobics and plays badminton * Open prediction b. No , she doesn’t - Ask Ss to predict which sports Lan and c. He plays soccer , jogs and Nam like (3 each) plays table tennis . d. Yes , he does

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

-

Get Ss’ predicti

on.

While reading. (8’) - Ask Ss to read A4. P 126 and check their predictions.

- Give feedback - Introduce the model: Which sports do you play? and ask Ss to translate it into - Listen and answer vietnamese.

- Play in teams * Comprehension questions: - Two Ss in each team have ask and “Lucky Numbers” answer -Give instruction and check * Answers keys: - Let Ss play in teams 1c 2* 3a 4d 5b 6* 7e a. She swims, does aerobics and she 8* plays badminton. b. No, she doesn’t Questions: c. He plays soccer, jogs and plays a. Which sports does Lan play? table tennis. b. Does Lan play tennis? c. Which sports does Nam play? d. Yes, he does. d. Does Nam play table tennis? e. Ss’answer e. Which sports do you play?

- Get Ss answers and correct.

5.Production. (3') - Learn by heart vocabulary and review the structure.

- Do exercises in workbook. + I am + She / He is V- ing + We / You /They + are - Prepare next lesson. Unit 12. Lesson 2. B14 -------------------------------o0o------------------------------

Kiểm tra ngày 18 tháng 02 năm ……………………………………………………. …………………………………………………… …………………………………………………….. …………………………………………………….

Week: 26 Period: 73

Unit 12 : (cont) Lesson 3: B- Free time (B1-4)

Preparation date: 18/2 Teaching date : 25/2

I. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge At the end of the lesson , Sts will be able to talk about what they do in their free time using the present simple tense and some activity verbs.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone. Willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PRESENTATION 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues

.2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s & Students’ activities

Contents

1. Warm up. (7’)“Matching” - Have Ss look at the pictures in Ex. B4.

128 and listen to the tape to match the names with the right pictures.

- Ask Ss to repeat the sentences they have heard.

- Control and give correct answers.

2.Presentation -TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Love family, friends T : Shows the pictures on the projector and asks Ps remark.

Ps : Remark the content of them T : Plays tape Ps : Listen T : Introduces words and structures Ps : Listen and write T : Reads them Ps : Repeats after teacher (choral-ind) T : Plays tape three times Ps : Repeat after the tape - Practice in pairs to ask – answer using “ What do you do ……?”

T : Corrects and remark T : Guides Ps how to change the subject in the structure Ps : Listen and remember 3.Practice: -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and be responsible for yourself and everyone.

I/ New words : - free time : thêi gian r¶nh rçi - (to) go fishing: c©u c¸ - (to) go to the movies: ®i xem phim - (to) go to the theater: ®i xem h¸t II/ Structures : Example: * What do you do in your free time ?

I go to the movies. * What does Phuong do in his free time ?

(He) Phuong goes to the movies. => Form: What do/ does + S + in........ free time ? - S + V(s,es)............. => Hái vµ tr¶ lêi xem ai ®ã lµm g× lóc r¶nh rçi.

- Let sts play slap the board (using picture B1) - Read sentence by sentence. (a - > f)

III/ Practice: 1-Picture drill: a. What do you do in your free time ?

- Now look at picture .a (B1)

(make a model first) - Look at the pictures on the projector and practice asking and answering.

Ss: Work in pairs to practice speaking.(a > f) - Call on some pairs to practice aloud.

- Show the pictures and ask Sts to match the name with the right picture. (a -> f) Ss: Work in group

4.Further practice - Have Ss listen to the tape and do Ex. B3.P.128 -Explain the 3r d personal and ask Ss to work in pairs to ask and answer about the pictures in Ex B1.

Eg: S1: What does Phuong do in his free time?

S2: He goes to the movies.

- Call on some pairs to practice in the class.

- Give feedback.

Ex: What do you do in your free time ?

-> I go fishing.

->I read. b. What does‌‌. do in his/ her free time ?

Ex: P1 : What does Phuong do in his free time ?

P2 : He goes to the movies ANSWER KEYS: b. Ly watches TV in her free time. c. Nam reads in his free time. d. Lan listens to music in her free time. e. Tuan goes fishing in his free time. f. Long play video games in his free time. * Have Ss write 3 things about what they do in their free time Eg: In my free time I watch TV, listen to music and play badminton.

2- Listen: -T: Play the tape and ask sts to check their matching.

Ss: Listen and match.

- T: Play the tape again.

Ss: listen again.

- T: Ask sts to give the answers Ss: Give the answers.

T: Check the answers. * Matching: Names Pictures Tan f Minh & Nam e

5.Production: Correct the mistakes ( on the projector) 1. In my free time, He go to the library.

He-> I 2. In his free time, he listen to music. listen -> listens 3. Hung and lan draw picture in our free time. our-> their 4. My brother go swimming in his free time. go -> goes - Learn by heart new words and structure - Do exercise B1,2,3- P138 in the workbook.

-Prepare: Unit 12: B5,C1,5.

Week: 26 Period:74

Lien Lan & Mai

Unit 12. Sports and pastimes Lesson 3. B5, free time

a b

Preparation date:20/2 Teaching date : 27/2

I. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use “How often....” questions and answers “once, twice, three times.....a week” to talk about frequency of activities 2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality:

4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

II. PRESENTATION 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: T’s activities Ss’activities I- Warm-up: 1.Warm-up: * Ask 3 ss to write two examples for each * Ask 3 ss to write two examples for beginning with: In my free time, I…… each beginning with: In my free time, Ss: write Example: In my free time, I go to the I…… museum.

Ss: write Example: In my free time, I go to the museum.Listen and match.

- Read the sentences.

- Listen and guess.

- Read in chorus and individual - Work with teacher.

2.Presentation.

-TM: Technical present….

-C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and be responsible for yourself and everyone. a. Pre teach.

- How often..? (explanation) - once - twice a week (situation) - three times * Checking: substitution drill.

- Give instruction and model:

II/ Structure : Ex : How often do you go to school ?

I go to school five times a week How often does she go to the movie ?

Eg: T says: one / two / three / four / five / six / seven.....

Ss say: once a week / twice a week............ b. Model sentences.

- Set the scene: Mai and Lien are talking about Ly’s activities.

How often does Ly go jogging?

She goes jogging once a week * Concept check.

- Ask Ss to translate the model.

- Have them give the form and use.

- Read the model and stressed.

She goes to the movies twice a month * Form:How often + do/ does + S + V ?

S + V(s,es) …once a week / a month Twice a week / a month => Hái vµ tr¶ lêi xem ai ®ã th−êng hay lµm nh÷ng viÖc g×.

How often + do / does + S + V...?

S + V(s, es) + ......once / twice.... * Hái ®¸p ai ®ã lµm g× bao l©u mét lÇn.

Eg: T. How often does Ly go to school?

Ss. She goes to school six times a week.

III.Listen - Listen to.

- Read the dialogue and find out the model.

- Listen and repeat.

- Copy the model - Translate into Vietnamese.

3.Practice.

-TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

“Picture drill”

IV.Practice

-Ask Ss to look at the pictures on page - Read “Ly’s diary” 129 about “Ly’s diary”.

- Work with teacher.

- Explain about the diary and ask Ss to - Work in pairs. practice asking and answering.

- Listen and answer

- Have Ss work in pairs.

- Work in groups

- Call on some pairs to practice in the - Practice in the class. class.

- Listen and copy.

- Control and give feedback.

- Listen and guess the words.

S1: How often does Ly go fishing?

S2: She goes fishing once a week.

- Repeat the words individual and in

etc.....

choral.

* Comprhension questions.

- Have Ss read the dialogue then answer the questions.

- Listen to and guess the answers.

- Ask them work in pairs to ask and answer.

- Give their answers

a. How often does Ly go to school? b. How

often

does

she

play

badminton? c. How often does she listen to music? d. How often does she play tennis ? e. How often does she go to the movies? f. How often does she jog? g. How often does she watch T.V? h. How often does she read book?

- Control and give feedback.

4.Further practice * Write it up: - Have Ss write sentences about you using

adverbs

of

frequency:

once

aweek,twice a week ,three times a week.

Eg: I go to the zoo three times a week I go to the park once a week etc........

5.Production - Learn by heart vocabulary and structure.

- Write a short text about how often you do some activities a week.

- Prepare next lesson.

Unit 12. C. How often?

Week: 26 Period: 75

Unit 12. Sports and pastimes Lesson 4.C. (1,2,3,4) How often?

Preparation date:22/2 Teaching date : 1/3

I. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the details of a story and use some adverbs of frequency with the simple present tense for regular activities.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality:

4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PRESENTATION 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: T’s activities Ss’activities 1.Warm-up: I. Warm-up: T: Ask ss: T: Ask ss: - How often do you go to the zoo ?

- How often do you go to the zoo ?

- How often do you go to the school ?

- How often do you go to the school ?

- How often do you go to the movies ?

- How often do you go to the movies ?

Ss: Answer Ss: Answer.

- Listen and guess the words.

- Repeat the words individual and in choral.

- Listen to and guess the answers.

- Give their answers 2. Pre reading.

-TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use -Q: Self-made and confident a. Pre teach.

- always.

- usually.

- often.

(Situation) - somtimes.

- never. * Checking: What and where. b. Pre questions.

- Introduce the story and ask Ss close the book and answer some questions about the story.

- What do Ba and Nam do in their free time?

- where do they often go?

II. Vocabulary - ( to) have a picnic: ®i d· ngo¹i - (to) go camping: ®i c¾m tr¹i - (to) fly kites : th¶ diÒu - a tent: cái lều

- How do they go to school?

- Get Ss’ answers.

3. While reading.

-TM: Discussion group, technical present -C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and be responsible for yourself and everyone.

- Have Ss read the story and check their answers.

- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and read the story to match the meanings of some newwords.

- Introduce the story and ask Ss close the book and answer some questions about the story.

- Get Ss’ answers.

Matching. a. b. c. d.

Th¶ diÒu C¸i lÒu ®i c¾m tr¹i ®i d· ngo¹i

1. (to) have a picnic 2. (to) go camping 3. (to) fly kites 4. a tent

II.Reading - Read the story and check their answers.

1. They play football, go to the park.

2.They often visit their friends 3. They go to school on foot.

III.Matching. a. b. c. d.

Th¶ diÒu C¸i lÒu ®i c¾m tr¹i ®i d· ngo¹i

1. (to) have a picnic 2. (to) go camping 3. (to) fly kites 4. a tent

- Work inpairs.

- Read the story and work in pairs to ask and answer.- Work individual - Share with their parners. * Answers. e. 3 f. 4 g. 2 h. 1 Guessing (T ) or (F) 1........Ba and Lan go to the zoo three time - Work individual. a year.

Answer: 2.......They usually go to the park.

1. T 3........They sometimes fly their kites.

2. F 4.........They always go camping.

3. T 5........They are never late for school.

4. F

6.........They always do their homework.

- Ask Ss to look at the pictures and read the story to chose (T) or (F).

T corrects.

Model sentences.

Ba and Lan sometimes go to the zoo.

They are never late for school.

• Exersice.

- She plays soccer in the afternoon( often) - We are late for class (never) * Note: tõ “tobe Trang tõ chØ tÇn suÊt ®øng tr−íc ®éng tõ th−êng, ®øng sau ®éng” * Comprhension questions.

- Have Ss read the story then answer the questions.

- Ask them work in pairs to ask and answer. a. How often do Ba and Lan go to the zoo? b. How often do they go to the park? c. How often do they have a picnic? d.How often do they do sports? a. How often do they fly kites? b. How often do they go camping? c. How often do they walk to school? d. How often do they do homework?

- Control and give feedback.

4. Post reading. * Comprhension questions. * Write it up: (C4) - Have Ss write sentences about them using adverbs of frequency: always, usually, often, sometimes, never.

Eg: I sometimes go to the zoo.

I never go to the park. etc......... * Ordering.

- Ask Ss work individual to rearrange the sentences with the words given. a. Nam and Ba / camping /never / go / have / don’t / they / a / tent / because.

5. T 6. T

Listen- repeat And coppy - She often plays soccer in the afternoon.

- We are never late for class. * Trang tõ chØ tÇn suÊt ®øng tr−íc ®éng tõ th−êng, ®øng sau ®éng

Answer - Work inpairs.

a. Nam and Ba never go camping because they don’t have a tent. b. They often go to the park.

b. often / to / park / go / the / they. c. How often do you help your Mom ? c. you / help / do / your / Mom / often / - Listen and copy how?

5.Production - Learn by heart vocabulary and structures.

- Do exercises in workbook.

- Prepare the next lesson. Unit 12. Lesson 6. C (5, 6) -------------------------------o0o-----------------------------Kiểm tra ngày 25 tháng 2 năm ……………………………………………………. …………………………………………………… …………………………………………………….. ……………………………………………………

Week: 27 Unit 12. Sports and pastimes Period: 76 Lesson 5. C. (5-6) How often?

Preparation date:25/2 Teaching date : 4/3

I. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand and further practice in simple present tense with adverbs of frequency. Read the text and answer the questions about the activitives in freetime 2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone, cooperate with people around,…

II. PRESENTATION 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES:

T’s activities 1. Warm up. (8’)

Ss’activities I.Warm up.

“Networks”

“Networks”

- Give instruction and check.

- Have Ss work in teams.

- Give instruction and check.

- Have Ss work in teams.

Adverb of frequency

Sometimes

Adverb of frequency

Sometimes - Listen and answer.

- Play in teams.

- Listen and do individual. * Answer keys: a. never b. sometimes c. often d. often e. usually

II.C5- Listen: *Matching: a.

- Ask Ss to listen to the tape and answer the 1.always 2.sometimes b. question “ How often do Nga and Lan do 3.usually c.

4.never d. these things” 5.often e.

- Have them listen twice and give feedback. *How often do Lan and Nga do these things ?

Activities vvvv vvv vv v Go camping Go to the zoo

Go jogging

* Listening. (C5)

x

Play soccer Have a picnic

2. Pre reading.

- Listen and guess.

- Repeat in choral and individual.

- Work in teams

-TM: technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

Pre teach. (7’) - (to) wear: (mime) - clothes (n) : (visual) - boots (n) : (meaning) - a camping stove : (translate) - overnight (adj & adv): qua đêm * Checking: Rub out and remember.

- Control and give feedback a. Presentation • Pre-questions What does Minh like?

Who does he usually go with?

3. While reading. (10’) -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Love family, friends and country - Ask students look at the picture and listen.

III.Practice - Read in silent and answer the - Have Ss read the text C6. P.132 about the questions. things Minh and his friends do in pastimes.

- Get Ss to read and answer the questions

(a – f)

- Play in teams

* Lucky Numbers: * Answer keys: - Give instruction and check.

- Have Ss work in two teams to ask and answer a. Minh likes walking. the questions : b. They always wear strong boots and S1: ask – S2 : answer. warm clothes.

1* 2 c 3a 4* 5 b c. He always goes on the weekend.

6* a. b. c. d. e. f.

7f 8e 9d What does Minh like doing?

What do they always wear?

When does he go?

Who does he usually go with?

Where does he often go?

What do they take?

4. Post reading. (10’) * Transformation writing.

- Have Ss use the text C6. P.132 to change”Minh” to “I”.

- Ask Ss work individual then share with their partners.

Eg: I like walking. On the weekend I often go walking in the mountains. .....

- Control and get feedback.

5.Production. (3’) - Learn by heart vocabulary.

- Translate the text into Vietnamese.

- Do exercises in workbook.

- Prepare next lesson.

Week:27 Period:77

d. He usually goes with his friends. e. He often goes walking in the mountain. f. They take food, water and a camping stove.

- Work individual “ I like walking. On the weekend I often go walking in the mountains. Iusually go with two friends. I and my friends always wear strong boots and warm clothes..”

- Listen and copy

Preparing date: 27/2/19 Teaching date:6/3/19 FEEDBACK ON TEST 45’

I./. OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: After getting back the test papers, students will be able to evaluate their knowledge and have a plan for the next time 2. Skills: To correct Ss’ errors if necessary 3. Attitude: - To give Ss the motivation to learn hard for their exam - Students know how to learn English in right way.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.Love family and country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II./.PREPARATION: 1.Teacher: test 45’ 2.Students: notebooks III./.PROCEDURE: 1- Warm up - How are you today?

- Are you ready for getting back the test papers?

2- Teacher's idea * Priority: - Ss do the part " choose the best answer " and writing well.

- Ss try their best to get good marks.

- Ss know how to do the test, present well, true request.

- Ss understand vocabularies, language focus. *Defect: - Some Ss have many mistakes about using vocabularies.

- Some Ss have many mistakes about writing sentences, using structure.

- Some Ss have many mistakes about showing.

- Some Ss copy other exams 3- Pay the test paper back to ss - Ss look at the tests and do the tests again by themselves.

- Ss find their mistakes by themselves.

- Ss share and compare with a partners.

-T asks Ss to work in pairs +S1 corrects mistakes of S2's test + S2 corrects mistakes of S1's test - T calls - Ss answer one by one

4- T gives ss the answer key -T: Gives the aims of the exercise from the test.

-Ss: Listen -T: Asks Ss to give the answers they did.

-Ss: Give the answers they did or write on board -T: Gives the correct answers.

-Ss: Listen and correct the mistakes -T: Explains some knowledge and the answers Key: 1. 0,25 p for each correct sentences Sentence

Key

Sentence

Key

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

F T T F A B B A B A B D B C

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

C C C B C B T F T F B B C B

WRITE: 2. 0,25 p for each correct sentences 29.Does Hoa like chicken or meat?

30.Their children are traveling by bus now.

33.Lan’s favorite drink is apple juice .

34. Nga has an oval face.

2.Write at least five sentences about yourself: 0.4 p for each correct sentences (Tape: Unit 9-A4) - Spend time with students to ask questions about their tests, their points.

- T asks Ss write key in notebook and correct their mistakes by themselves.

5-Production:

- Redo the test in the notebook - Prepare new lesson ----------------------@0@-----------------Week: 27 Period: 78

Unit 13 : Activities and the seasons Lesson 1: A- The weather and seasons (A1,2)

Preparation date: 1/3 Teaching date : 8/3

I. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask and answer about the weather using “ What’s the weather like? “ and season vocabulary.

Students will be able to talk about the weather.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Love family and country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around, Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.…

II. PRESENTATION 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s & Students’ activities Contents 1. Warm up.

“Net works” - Give instruction and check.

- Have Ss work in teams.

- Give a topic “ Pastimes in the country”

I.Warm up.

“Net works” - Give instruction and check.

- Have Ss work in teams.

- Give a topic “ Pastimes in the country”

Pastimes in the Pastimes in the country country

go fish

go camping

go fishing go camping

2.Presentation -TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident T : Shows the pictures on the board and asks Ps to remark Ps : Remark the content of it T : Draws networks Ps: Give the meaning of the “season” T : “How many seasons are there in Vietnam” Ps : Answer T : What are they ?

Ps : Answer T : Asks Ps to remark the weather on the seasons Ps : Remark T : Plays tape once Ps : Listen T:Introduce words and structures Ps : Write T : Reads word twice Ps : Listen and repeat T : Plays tape twice Ps : Listen and repeat T : Corrects and remark

II. Newwords : - weather (n) : thêi tiÕt - season (n): mïa - spring (n): mïa xu©n - summer (n): mïa hÌ - fall= autumn (n) : mïa thu - winter (n): mïa ®«ng - warm (adj): Êm ¸p - cool (adj): m¸t mÎ

III. Structure : Example: What’s the weather like in the summer ?

It’s hot. */ Form : What is the weather like in.......... ?

It is + adj.

3.Practice -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical IV. Practice: present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and be responsible for yourself and everyone.

1.Matching T: Give modeling

( Introduce the question about the weather)

cold Hot warm cool

- Get sts to do pairwork.

- Make a model first ( Picture a) - Call some pairs to practice speaking. ( using pictures P 134)

4.Futher practice T: Ask sts to ask and answer about the weather today in some places.

Ss: Pairwork.

- Talk about the weather in some places.

In Vietnam and in other places.

spring summer fall winter

2. Picture drill P1: What’s the weather like in the fall ?

P2: It’s cool.

P1: What’s the weather like in the summer?

P2: It’s hot.

3. Further practice + Hanoi/ cold/ winter. + Sonla/ hot/ summer. + Dalat/ cool/ summer. + Vietnam/ warm/ fall.

Ex: What’s the weather like in Ha Noi? It’s cold in the winter.

V/ Homework: - Learn by heart new words and structure - Do exercises part A1,2/ p108 in the workbook.

- Prepare: Unit 13: A3.

5.Production -T: Ask ss to retell the leson.

Ss: Answer *Gap- fill 1. It’s …hot….. in the summer.

2. In the …spring……., it’s warm.

3. In the winter, it’s…cold……

4. it’s cool in the……fall……

- Learn by heart new words and structure - Do exercises part A1,2/ p108 in the workbook.

- Prepare: Unit 13: A3.

-------------------------------o0o-----------------------------Kiểm tra ngày 4 tháng 3 năm ……………………………………………………. …………………………………………………… …………………………………………………….. …………………………………………………….

Week: 28 Period: 79

Unit 13. activities and the seasons Lesson 2. a. 3

Preparation date: 4/3 Teaching date : 11/3

I. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about their favorite weather and contrast the question “ what weather do you like ? “ with “ what’s the weather like? “.

Students will be able to talk about the seasons they like and describe each season they like.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone. live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PRESENTATION 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s & Students’ activities 1. Warm up.

“Wordsquare” - Give instruction and check.

Contents I.Warm up.

“Wordsquare” * Answer keys:

- Have Ss work in teams. f x g o t c w

a w n n h o e

l a i l s o a

l r r n i l t

c m p i t k h

o n s o s e e

l s u m m e r

d s e a s o n

 spring summer, season, go, me.. fall, cold, warm, cool, weather. hot, winter, like

- Control and give feedback.

2.Presentation -TM: technical present….

-C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made -T: Elicit and have them to give the model II.Structure : sentences.

Ex: What weather do you like?

-T: Tell them to give the structures and does she / he explains then tells them to copy.

- Checks meaning, form and use.

I like

hot weather

She / he likes adj

n

* Form: What weather + do / does + S + like ?

S+ like / likes+ cool/ cold/ warm/ hot weather Hái vµ tr¶ lêi xem ai ®ã thÝch thêi tiÕt g×.

3.Practice -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

- Play the tape – Ss listen and repeat.

III. Practice:

- Guide Ss to read.

- Get Ss to read it in silence.

- Call some Ss to read. *Picture Drill:(A 3 p135) T : Ask Ps to ask – answer about them

* Picture drill

Ps : Practice in pairs before class

P1: What weather do you like?

T : Correct and remark

P2: I like cold weather

Ex : What weather do you like ?

I like cool weather -T: Give them an example and tells them * Noughts and Crosses: to work in pairs in 2’

You / hot

Ss: Pairwork.

Hoa

- T:Call on some of them to practice.

Tho/ cold

warm

Ha / hot.

Hue / hot Long An / cool

( Noughts and Crosses)

He / cold Lan /warm

and She/

They / cool

- Get them to play game.

- Give them the table and an example.

Ex:

- Get them to work in groups.

-What weather do you like?

Ss: work in groups.

I like hot weather.

- Check and say the winner.

4.Further practice “Mapped dialogue”

*Example exchange:

- Give instruction and check.

S1: What’s the weather like in Hanoi?

- Let Ss have time to practice in pairs.

S2: It’s cold.

CAN THO

HA NOI

What’s the weather like in Can tho?

S1: It’s hot.

..........in Hanoi?

......cold

S2: What weather do you like?

......in

S1: I like cold weather.

………Cantho?

What weather do you like?

.........hot.

......like?

S2: I like hot weather.

.........cold. ......like?

...... hot.

IV. Home work

5.Production

- Learn by heart vocabulary and structure. Have ss complete the sentences using the - Do exercises in workbook.

words given.

- Prepare next lesson. Unit 13. Lesson 3.

a. She / like / cool weather

A (4).

She likes cool weather b. They / like / warm weather They like warm weather c. We / like / hot weather We like hot weather

Week: 28 Period: 80

Unit 13 (cont) Lesson 3: A4

Preparation date: 6/3 Teaching date : 13/3

I. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand” when clause” in positive statements and “Wh” questions.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PRESENTATION 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s & Students’ activities

Contents

1.Warm up.

Warm up.

“Chain game” - Give instruction and check.

- Have Ss work in groups of five.

Eg: T says: “I like hot weather”.

S1 says: She likes hot weather and I like cold weather.

S2: She likes hot weather, he likes weather and I like cool weather. ect.......

- Control and correct mistakes.

“Chain game” - Give instruction and check.

- Have Ss work in groups of five.

Eg: T says: “I like hot weather”.

S1 says: She likes hot weather and I like cold weather.

S2: She likes hot weather, he likes weather and I like cool weather. ect.......

- Control and correct mistakes.

2.Pre- reading: -TM: Play game, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident

I.A4- Read:

*Prediction

T: Shows the pictures on the board and asks Ps to remark Ps : Name the activities T : Reads part A4 twice Ps : Listen T : Guides Ps how to understand the meaning of sentences 3.While-reading: -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

weather - hot - cold - cool - warm

Ba’s activities activities -go swimming -play soccer - gojogging - go fishing

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

Ss: Practice reading the text.

-T: Ask sts to listen and check their prediction.

Ss: Listen and check.

- T: Have sts read in silence.

Ss: Read individually.

- T:Call some sts to practice reading.

Ss: Read in front of the class.

-T: Have ss ask and answer about Ba. Ss: Work in pairs to ask and answer * Structure about Ba. Eg: - What do you do when it's hot?

- Practice speaking aloud.

- T: Call on some pairs to practice.

When it's hot, I go swimming.

- Get sts to work in pairs , ask and answer - What does Ba do when it's cold? about themselves When it's cold, he plays soccer.

What do/does + S + do when it's + adj?

When it's + adj + S + V- (s/es) + O. * Adj = hot, cold, warm, cool... *Example exchange P1:What does Ba do when it’s hot?

P2: When it’s hot, he goes swimming 4. Post-reading: - Ask sts to close the book. *Survey: - Retell about what Ba does when it’s When it’s Nam Hoa … hot/cold/warm/ cool? cold play soccer - Take a survey. hot …

- Ask your friends (at least 3 people) cool …

“What do you do when it’s cold/ hot/ warm … cool/warm?

Ex: P1:What do you do when it’s cold?

P2: When it’s cold, I play soccer * Remember: II.A5-Remember: - Give the situations and ask Ss to find out the form and practice them in real What do you do when it’s cold ? situations When it’s cold ,I play soccer What does he do when it’s hot ?

When it’s hot , he goes swimming What’s the weather like ?

It’s hot / warm / cold / cool 5.Production Have ss complete the sentences using the words given. a. When / hot / I / swimming When it’s hot , I go swimming b. What / you / do / when / hot ?

What do you do when it’s hot ? c. When / cold / she / jogging When it’s cold , she goes jogging - Learn by heart new words and structure - Do exercises part A4/ p110 in the workbook.

- Prepare: Unit 13: B1

Week: 28 Period: 81

V.Homework.

- Write the text about themselves in notebook.

- Learn by heart vocabulary and structures.

- Prepare next lesson.

Unit 13. Lesson 4. B. 1 Activities in seasons

Unit 13. activities and the seasons Lesson 4. b. 1 Activities in seasons.

Preparation date: 8/3 Teaching date : 15/3

I. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, students will be able to make sentences using the present tense to talk about sports and seasons. Review some adverbs of frequency.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing

3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone, cooperate with people around,…

II. PRESENTATION 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES:

Teacher’s & Students’ activities

Contents

1.Warm-up: T : Ask ss to play: Matching game.

Ps : Play “ Matching” game - always thØnh tho¶ng - often lu«n lu«n - usually th−êng xuyªn - cometimes kh«ng bao giê - never th−êng hay 2.Presentation -TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident -T: Present newwords - Check meaning By asking : What are they doing ? Are they swimming ? …………

-T: Ask ss to practice the newords.

Ss: Practice the newwwords.

-T: Play the tape and ask Sts to listen and repeat Ss: Listen and repeat.

I.Warm-up: T : Ask ss to play: Matching game.

Ps : Play “ Matching” game - always thØnh tho¶ng - often lu«n lu«n - usually th−êng xuyªn - cometimes kh«ng bao giê - never

th−êng hay

II. Newwords - activity(n) : ho¹t ®éng - basketball (n): bãng ræ -(to) sail= go sailing: ®i du thuyÒn

3.Practice -TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and be responsible for yourself and everyone.

T: Call ss to read the sentences.

III. Practice: Ss: Read. * Listen and repeat T: Ask Sts to ask and answer about the pictures P 138 / 139 * Picture drill Ss: Work in pairs asking and ansering.

We often play volleyball in the spring.

T: Ask Sts to practice in pairs then OP They sometimes go sailing in the fall. to check.

I often go swimming..............

Ss: Practice.

She usually plays badminton..............

We always play basketball.............

He never goes fishing ..................

T: Guide Ss to play the games lucky numbers. Then divides the class into two teams (Note : Ss can answer the questions with what they really do ,Not what it says in the book) Ss: practice answering.

T: control and correct their mistakes

* Practice asking and answering What do you do in the spring ?

We often play volleyball.

What do they do in the fall ?

They ………………….

What do you do in the summer ?

I …………………………….

What does he do in the winter ?

He ………………………………… * Lucky Numbers 1 2 3* 4 5* 6 7 8 9*

4.Further practice T: Ask Sts to write about the activities they do in each season.

Ss: Write.

T: Ask two Sts to write in a big sheet of paper then hang it on the board to give feedback Ss: Write on the poster.

T: Ask Sts to read the right passage again 5.Production Ask ss to write the adverbs in the right positions. a. It is always hot in the summer (always)

1. What’s the weather like in the winter?

2. What do you usually do in the fall?

3. LN 4. What’s the weather like in the spring?

5. LN 6. What do you usually do in the summer?

7. What weather do you like?

8. What sports do you play in the winter?

9. LN *Write it up: Eg : Hello , My name is ………….. I like sports very much . In the summer , I often go swimming …………..

b. What do you often do when it’s cold ? (often) c. It is never hot in the winter (never) d. Do you sometime walk in the mountain ? (sometime) - Learn by heart new words and structure .

- Do exercises part B1/ p110- 111 in the workbook.

- Prepare: Unit 13: B2.

Kiểm tra ngày 11 tháng 3 năm …………………………………………… ……………………………………………. ……………………………………………… ………………………………………………

Week: 29 Period: 82

Unit 13 : (cont) Lesson 5: B- Activities in seasons (B2)

Preparation date: 11/3 Teaching date : 18/3

Test 15’ No4

I. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand and write some sentences to talk about their activities that they do in different seasons.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Love family and country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around, Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.…

II. PRESENTATION 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: 1.Test 15’ Teacher’s & Students’ activities Contents 2.Pre- writing -TM: technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident - Guide Ss to use form, which is used to ask about one's activities in seasons.

- Give an example.

- Get Ss to set up the form.

- Get them to give examples.

II. Structure:

* Ask and answer about one's activities in seasons.

Eg: Minh: What do you do in the spring? does he/she Ba: I always ride my bike.

He/She rides his/ her bike.

What do/does + do + in the + season? → S + adv + V / Vs / Ves + O. Seasons: spring, summer, fall, and winter.

Adv: always, usually, often, sometimes.

3.While-Writing -TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and be responsible for yourself and everyone.

- Guide Ss to write things they do in each season.

- Get them to write in individually, and then compare their writing with each other.

- Call some Ss to go to the board and write, and some others read.

- Correct.

III. Practice: 1) Write lists of things you do in the different seasons.

Eg: a. Spring In the spring, I often go fishing. b. Summer In the summer, I always go swimming. c. Fall In the fall, I sometimes go jogging. d. Winter In the winter, I usually play badminton.

- Guide Ss to make dialogues.

2) Make dialogues.

- Get them to work in pairs to make Eg: dialogues.

Nga: What do you do in the spring?

- Call some pairs to practice new dialogues Hoa: I always go fishing. before the class.

What do you do?

- Listen and correct.

Nga: I often play badminton.

3)Write about you.

Eg:

- Get Ss to write bout them. Begin with: In In the spring, I usually go fishing and the spring, I...

- Get them to write in individually, and then sailing in the summer, I always go compare their writing with each other. swimming in the summer. I never go - Call some Ss to read their writings.

- Correct.

camping in the winter.

4.Post-Writing “Ordering” - Ask Ss to work individually to rearrange * Answer keys. the sentences. a. We play volleyball in the Spring. a. we / play / often / spring / volleyball / b. They sometimes go sailing in the the / in.

Fall. b. sometimes / they / fall / sailing / go. c. I / swimming / summer / often / go. c. I often go swimming in the summer. d. she / badminton / usually / fall / plays. d. She usually plays badminton in the e. always / play / we / winter / fall. basketball. e. We always play basketball in the f. he / goes / never / winter / fishing. winter.

- Control and get feedback.

- Have Ss go to the board to write the f. He never goes fishing in the winter. correct sentences.

- Call some Ss to read their writings.

- Correct.

5.Production - Write about themselves begin with “I like.......”

- Do exercises in work book.

- Prepare next lesson.

TEST 15’ Reading text then complete .

I ..(0).. usually eat breakfast. I only have ..(1)….. of coffee. I don’t eat. ..(2).. until about eleven o’clock then I have a biscuit and a glass of ....(3).. for lunch. I usually have some salad. That’s ....(4).. about two o’clock. I have ....(5).. at half past six in the afternoon. I am a vegetarian so I don’t eat ....(6).. of fish. I eat cheese and eggs and things like that. I have a glass of water or ....(7).. with my meal. At the weekend I go to a ....(8).. in the evening. You can.. ..(9).. vegetarian meal in a.. ..(10) restaurants now.

0. (a). don’t b. not c. am not d. no 1.a. a packet b. a cup c. a can d. a bowl

2.a. any 3.a. peas 4.a. at 5.a. breakfast 6.a. meat 7.a. water 8.a. store 9.a. get 10.a. many

b. some b. rice b. on b. lunch b. rice b. soda b. restaurant b. getting b. much

c. anything c. chocolates c. in c. dinner c. vegetables c. fruit c. shop c. to get c. dozen

d. something d. milk d. of d. supper d. noodles d. lemonade d. apartment d. gets d. lot of

----------THE END-------KEY: Sentence 1 2 3 4 5

Key b c d a c

Sentence 6 7 8 9 10

Key a d b a d

Bn Week: Unit 14 : Making plans Preparation date:13/3 29 Lesson 1: A- Vacation destinations (A1-3) Teaching date : 20/3 Period: 83 II. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use future tense with “going to” and make positive statements, Wh-questions to ask answer about vacation.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.Love country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PRESENTATION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s & Students’ activities Contents 1. Warm up.

“Pattern puzzle” - Give instruction and check.

- Ask Ss to make words from the letters.

E

R O

A

I.Warm up.

“Pattern puzzle” - Give instruction and check.

- Ask Ss to make words from the letters.

A

E R

T O

T

- Control and give feedback.

2.Pre- reading -TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident T : Shows the pictures and asks Ps to remark Ps : Remark T : Introduces new lesson - Plays tape - Introduces new words .

- Reads words Ps : Listen and repeat => Checking: matching.

T: Have ss predict What, Where, How long Lan is going to …

T : Plays tape twice (A1) Ps : Listen and repeat

II. New words : - vacation = holiday : kú nghØ - citadel (n): thµnh, luü - beach(n): b·i biÓn - aunt(n): c«, d× - uncle(n): chó, b¸c - stay (v) : ë l¹i - visit (v) : th¨m viÕng - be going to do: dù ®Þnh lµm g× ®ã

3.While- reading -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

T: Have ss to practice reading the dialogue.

III. Reading: Ps: Read the dialogue T : Correct the prediction * prediction: Lan is going to and aunt

visit Hue stay with uncle stay for a week

* Answer the question : Ps : Practice in pairs to ask – answer the a. She is going to visit Hue question in part A2 b. She is going to stay with my aunt - Write the answer on the board and uncle T : Corrects and gives the answer c. She is going to stay for a week T : Guides Ps how to make a dialogue d. She is going to visit the citadel.

Ps : Listen and make a dialogue with their partners 4.Post- reading *Write : T: Ask ss to write the dialogue they have just A : What are you going to do this finished on their notebooks. summer vacation ?

Ps: Write in their notebooks B : I am going to visit Ha Long Bay A : Where are you going to stay ?

B : I’m going to stay in a hotel .

A : How long are you going to stay ?

B : I am going to stay for two weeks A : What are you going to do ?

B : I’m going to visit the beach and swim .

IV Structure: - T: Present grammar S + be going to + V1 Ask Sts to find the sentences to tell about Ex : I’m going to visit Hue Lan’s plans .

She is going to do her homework Ss: find out . tonight

T: let ss practive the examples and ask them to give form and use.

Ss: Practice the examples.

T: Ask Sts to make sentences , using the word cues .

Ss: Make sentences .

=> Th× t¬ng lai gÇn diÔn t¶ nh÷ng hµnh ®éng sÏ x¶y ra trong t¬ng lai. * Wordcues: - I / visit Hue I am going to visit Hue. We / stay in a hotel He / camp in the mountain

V. Homework: 5.Production - Learn the newwords and the -T: Ask ss to retell the leson. structures by heart.

Ss: Answer - Do exercises part A1,2 in the T : Have ss change the sentences into workbook. negatives and questions.

- Prepare: Unit 14: A4-6.

1. I am going to visit Ha Noi. I am not going to visit Ha Noi. Are you going to visit Ha Noi? 2. Hoa is going to stay with her aunt.

3. They are going to see a movies with their friends.

Learn the newwords and the structures by heart.

Do exercises part A1,2 in the workbook.

Week: 29 Period: 84

Unit 14. Making plans Lesson 2. a. (4-5) Vacation destination.

Preparation date:15/3 Teaching date : 22/3

I. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read a textabout vacation plans to understand the details and practice “going to” and sequencing words: first, then, next, after that, finally.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone. Love country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PRESENTATION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s & Students’ activities Contents 1. Warm up.

“Matching” - Give instruction and check.

- Have Ss work in teams.

A B Ben Thanh Nha Trang The beach HCM city The citadel Hanoi Ngoc Son Temple Quang Ninh Ha Long Bay Hue - Control and get feedback.

I.Warm up.

“Matching” - Give instruction and check.

- Have Ss work in teams.

A

B

Ben Thanh

Nha Trang

The beach

HCM city

The citadel

Hanoi

Ngoc Son Temple

Quang Ninh

Ha Long Bay

Hue

Ex : I’m going to visit many places on my summer vacation . First , I am going to Sam Son . Next, I’m going to visit Hue . Then I’m

going to visit Nha Trang . After that, I`m going to stay in HCM city for two days.

2. Pre - reading

Finally, I am going to visit Da Lat.

-TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Be responsible for yourself and everyone.Love family, friends and country * Pre – teach vocab T : Gives an example and asks Ps to guess underline words Ps : Guess the meaning of the words T : Introduces new words Ps : Listen and write T : Reads words twice Ps : Listen and repeat T : Asks Ps to do exercise “Ordering statements” Ordering : Phuong and Mai are going to visit the five places you’ve matched in their summer vacation . Where are they going to go first ? second ? third ? fourth ? fifth ? Let’s guess - Plays tape Ps : Listen and order statements T : Asks Ps to open the books and listen to the tape

II. New words : - first : tríc tiªn - next : kÕ tiÕp - then : sau ®ã - after that: kÕ tiÕp sau - finally : cuèi cïng - grandfather (n): «ng néi,ngo¹i - grandmother (n): bµ néi,ngo¹i III. Listen and read: 1- Ordering statements: a. They are going to stay in Nha Trang for 3 days b. They are going to visit Ha Long Bay c. They are going to see Ngoc Son Temple d. They are going to visit Hue for 2 days e. They are going to visit their grandfather and grandmother in HCM city for a week * Answer key: 1-b, 2-c, 3-d, 4-a, 5-e.

Ps : Look at the books and listen to the tape 3.While - reading -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident T:Ask Sts to read the text and check the prediction Ss: Give the answers.

T: Ask Sts to read the second time and complete the table

2- Complete the table

Ss: Complete the table.

Places

Where

How

What

to visit

to stay

long

to do ?

Ha

Aunt

Two

HLB

Long

and

days

Bay

uncle

Then

Hanoi

Hotel

Next

Hue

3 days

After

Nha

Friend’s 2 days

that

Trang

house

Finally

HCMC

Grandfa

- Ask Sts these questions to complete the table What place are they going to visit first ?/

First

then / next ? …

Where are they going to stay ?

How long are they going to stay What are they going to do there

ther

NSon Citadel Beach

3 days … a week

4.Post - reading Ask Sts to use the table to make sentences.

* Write it up:

: Have ss ask and answer about Phuong

First, Phuong and Mai are going to visit Ha Long Bay. They are going to stay …..

and Mai using the table above

* Ask and answer:

Retell

Ex: Which place are Phuong and Mai going

- Ask Ss to look at the table and retell to visit first? the details.

They are going to visit Ha Long Bay first.

Eg: Mai and Phuong are going to visit

Where are they going to stay?

many places on their vacation. First,

They are going to stay with their uncle and

they are going to visit Ha Long. When

aunt.

they arrive Ha Long Bay for two days, they are going to stay with their uncle and aunt....

- Help Ss use their own words.

- Control and correct mistakes.

5.Production - Write a passage to tell about their IV.Homework.

- Write a passage to tell about their vacation vacation (immagine). (immagine).

- Do the exercises in workbook.

- Do the exercises in workbook.

- Prepare the next lesson.

- Prepare the next lesson.

Unit 14. Lesson 3. B. Free time plans (1- 4) Unit 14. Lesson 3. B. Free time plans (14)

-------------------------------o0o-----------------------------Kiểm tra ngày 18 tháng 3 năm ……………………………………………………. …………………………………………………… …………………………………………………….. …………………………………………………….

Week: 30 Period: 85

Unit 14. making plans Lesson 3. B. (1-4) free time plans.

Preparation date:18/3 Teaching date : 25/3

I. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, students will be able to further speaking practice with “going to” to talk about plans for the future.

Students will be able to talk and write about their plan at the weekend.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone. Love country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PRESENTATION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s & Students’ activities

Contents

1. Warm up.

I.Warm up.

Chatting.

Chatting.

- Ask Ss some questions.

- Ask Ss some questions. a. What are you doing after school? d. What are you doing after school? b. Where are you going this summer? e. Where are you going this summer? c. What are you going to do this f. What are you going to do this evening? evening?

- Have Ss answer individually.

2.Presentation -TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made T: Elicit the question : * What do you do in your free time ? * What are you going to do tonight ?

Ps : Answer T : Introduces the content of the conversation T : Introduces new words II. New words : - tonight : tèi nay Ss: Practice the newords.

- tomorrow : ngµy mai T: Ask Sts to predict the dialogue - match : trËn ®Êu between Tuan and Lan - see a movie : xem phim Ss: Guess.

3.Practice -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

III. Practice: T: Ask Sts to listen and repeat : B1 and B1 :Listen and repeat check their prediction Tuan: What are you going to do tonight?

Ss: Listen and check.

Lan: I’m going to do my homework.

T: Ask Sts to read the dialogue again Tuan: What are you going to do tomorrow?

Ss: Read.

Lan: It’s Sunday. I’m going to visit my friend.Then we’re going to see a movie .What about you?

Tuan: Tonight, I’m goimg to play badminton.

Tomorrow, I’m going to watch a soccer match.

B2 : Mapped dialogues T: Ask Sts to make similar dialogues Ss: Make mapped dialogue. ………….. tonight ? ……….. see a movie T: Ask Sts to listen and read the dialogue . between Nga and Ba and answer the …………. Tonight ? questions ………help my mom

What is Ba going to do?

Which theater is he going to ?

- What is he going to see ?

Ss: Read . Then answer the questions.

……….tomorrow ? ……..play volleyball

………Go walking ……….tomorrow ?

B 3 : Listen and read 4.Further practice - He is going to see a movie - Explain some words in dialogue - He is going to Sao Mai theater between Nga and Ba. - He is going to see the movie “ - Jurassic park : c«ng viªn kû Jura Jurassic Park - (to) know : biÕt * DÊu hiÖu nhËn biÕt cña th× t¬ng lai - Ask Ss read the dialogue B3. 144 and gÇn: tonight, tomorow, on the weekend, answer the questions. next week, next month... a. Is Ba going to play football ? b. Is he going to see a movie ? c. Which theater is he going to ? d. Which film is he going to see?

- Control and get feedback.

“Chain game” - Give instruction and check.

- Ask Ss work in group of three to do exercise B 4.

B4 : Answer . Then write the answers in your exercise book .

Eg: - On Saturday morning I’m going to - Call on some groups to practice before ………. the class.

- On Saturday afternoon Im going to - Give good mark for good group. ….

- Give feedback.

- On Saturday evening I’m ………

- On Sunday morning …………

- On Sunday afternoon ………

- On Sunday evening …………

“Chain game” S1: On Saturday morning I’m going to go shopping.

S2: On Saturday morning I’m going to go shopping and on Saturday afternoon I’m going to watch TV.

5. Production T: Ask Sts to practice in pairs to ask and answer about the weekend then write in the notebook .

Ss: Answer. Then write in the notebook.

- Write about their plans for tonight and tomorrow + weekend - Do exercises part B1/ p115 in the workbook.

- Prepare: Unit 14: B5,6,7.

Week: 30 Period: 86

S3: On Saturday morning I’m going to go shopping and on Saturday afternoon I’m going to watch TV and on Saturday evening I’m going to see a movie....

IV. Homework: - Write about their plans for tonight and tomorrow + weekend - Do exercises part B1/ p115 in the workbook.

- Prepare: Unit 14: B5,6,7.

Unit 14. making plans Lesson 4. B. (5-6) free time plans.

Preparation date:20/3 Teaching date : 27/3

II. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, students will be able to listening and reading practice with “going to” 2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone. Love country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PRESENTATION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens

III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s & Students’ activities 1. Warm up.

“Survey” - Give instruction and check.

- Get ss work in groups.

- Have Ss use “ What are you going to do tonight / on Saturday / on Sunday / in the summer vacation ?”

- Control and get feedback.

2.Pre –reading: -TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident * Pre –teach vocab: -T elicits by using pictures on the board and models 2 times.

Ss: listen and say out the words => Check vocab:ROR * Set the sence: Minh , Nam and Tuan are going to have a picnic .

- T: Ask them some questions about Minh and calls on some of them to asnwer. +where are they going to go? +what 3 things are they going to bring? +what are they going to do there?

Ss: Answer. *Brainstrom: -T gives the topic on the board and tells them to guess in groups in 1’.

Ss: work in group.

- T calls on some of them in each group go to the board and give the predictions.

Ss: go to the board and give the predictions 3.While –reading:

Contents I.Warm up.

“Survey” - Have Ss use “ What are you going to do tonight / on Saturday / on Sunday / in the summer vacation ?”

- Control and get feedback.

II. Vocablary: -a camera :m¸y ¶nh -(to)bring :mang theo. (to) take a photo: chôp ¶nh

TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

-T asks them to open their book on p145 , read and check the prediction.

Ss: read and check the prediction -T gets them to give the anwer.

Ss: give the asnwer -T checks and has them copy.

Ss: Copy.

T Ask Sts to read the second time to answer the questions Ss: Anser.

4.Post –reading: Listen- B6 Brainstorming” - Give instruction and check.

- Have Ss work in teams.

Things to bring for a camping vacation.

a kite

a tent

food

warm clothes

Question : Are Vui and her four friends going to camp ?

What are they going to bring ?

III.Reading: * Prediction: Things they are going to bring + Nam: camera + Tuan: some food + Minh: some drinks. * Answer the questions: A . What is Nam going to bring ?

Nam is going to bring a camera B . What is Tuan going to bring ?

Tuan is going to bring some food C . What is Minh going to bring ?

Minh is going to bring some drink .

IV Listening: * Predict - Have Ss guess the things people bring when they go camping.

Vui a ball Ly a camera Lan some food Mai some drink Nga a tent What are they going to bring ?

Pictures

Do you know who is going to bring a ball , a Vui c+ e camera ……..?

Ly b Please listen and asnwer this question Lan a T Ask Sts to guess first Mai d Ss: guess.

Nga d T: Ask Sts to listen and check Ss: Give the answer.

Give feedback T Ask Sts to write five sentences about the * Write : five girls and ask some Sts to write on the Eg : Vui is going to bring a tent and board some food Ly is going to bring a camera …………..

5.Production -Learn by heart vocabulary and translate the text into Vietnamese.

- Do the exercises in workbook.

- Prepare next lesson.

Unit 14. Lesson 5. C. Suggestions (1- 3).

Week: 30 Period: 87

Unit 14. making plans Lesson 5. C. (1-3) Suggestions.

Preparation date:21/3 Teaching date : 28/3

I. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand how to make suggestions with “Let’s..” and responding, Make sentences using “want to” 2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.Love country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PRESENTATION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s & Students’ activities Contents 1. Warm up. (5’) I.Warm up. (5’) “Brainstorming” - Give instruction and check.

- Have Ss work in teams.

- Ask Ss to answer the question: Where do people often go on vacation ?

- Give feedback.

2.Pre- reading -TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident T : Draws a bus to introduces the words “minibus” Ps : Give the meaning of words T : Gives an example - I want to have a picnic this Sunday , but I don’t know where to go . Can you give me some suggestions Ps : Give the meaning of under line word => Check: R.O.R *Pre - questions: -T: writes the questions on the board and tells them to guess the asnwers in 2’.

Ss: Guess what answers are.

-T calls on some of them to give the predictions. *Presentation dialogue: ( C 1 p147) -T plays the tape 2 times and gets them to listen carefully.

Ss: Listen.

“Brainstorming” Eg: They often go to Ha Long Bay They often go to Hue. They often go to the beach. ...etc.....

II.New words : - minibus (n) : xe buýt nhá - pagoda(n) : chïa - suggestion(n) : sù gîi ý - good idea(n) : ý kiÕn hay - (to) want to do sth : muèn lµm g× Ex: I want to go to Nha Trang.

III. Reading : * Pre- questions: 1. Where are they going to go?

2.How are they going to travel?

3.While- reading -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and be responsible for yourself and everyone.

-T: Ask ss to practice in groups to read the conversation.

Ss: Read in groups.

- T: Have ss practice in pairs to ask – answer the questions.

Ss: Pairwork.

- Give the answer before class T : Corrects and remarks - Gives the answer 4.Post- reading T : Introduces structures Ps : Listen and write - Give examples

T : Have ss practice the examples.

Ps : practice.

T: Get ss use the pictures in the book to practice.

Ss: give suggestions using the pictures.

-T Shows the example exchanges.

Ss: Make suggestions.

- T calls some Ss to check Ss: Give the answers.

* Answer the questions: a. Nam wants to go to Hue b. Nga wants to go to Huong Pagoda c. Lan wants to travel by walk d. Because it’s too far e. He wants to travel by bike f. Because it’s too hot g. Ba wants to travel by minibus IV. Structure : *CÊu tróc lêi ®Ò nghÞ Let’s + Vnt What about + V-ing …… ?

Why don’t you / we + Vnt ……… ? * §¸p l¹i lêi ®Ò nghÞ (+): Yes, that’s a good idea.

(- ): No, I don’t want.

Ex : Let’s help him do it. - That`s a good idea.

What about helping him ? -No, I don’t want.

Why don’t we help him ?- No, I don’t want. * Picture drill Picture a) Let`s go swimming. picture b) What about going to the museum............. * Mapped dialogue.

Example: S1: Let’s go to see a movie ?

S2: No, Why don’t we go to the

beach?

S1: No, it’s too hot.

What about going to museum?

S2: Yes, Let’s walk.

S1: No, why don’t we go minibus?

5.Production V.Homework. (3’) - Have Ss to read the dialogue and work in pairs - Learn by heart vocabulary to ask and answer the questions. structure.

Eg: S1. What does Lan want to do ?

- Do exercises in workbook.

S2. She wants to go camping.

- Answer the questions on page - Call some pairs to do in the class. in the notebooks.

- Give feedback.

- Prepare next lesson. * Mapped dialogue.

- Give instructions and check.

- Have Ss work in pairs.

You Your friend .....see a movie

No,..........go to the beach

No, ...........too hot. .......go to the museum.

Yes,..............walk.

No, ..............go by minibus.

- Cotrol and get feedback.

Yes

-------------------------------o0o-----------------------------Kiểm tra ngày 25 tháng 3 năm ……………………………………………………. …………………………………………………… …………………………………………………….. …………………………………………………….

the by and 148

Week: 31 Period: 88 II. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge

Grammar Practice

Preparation date: 25/3 Teaching date : 1/4

By the end of the lesson, students will be able to further practice in present simple, Adverbs of frequencey, present progressive, “going to” future, the weather.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.Love country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PRESENTATION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s & Students’ activities Contents 1. Warm up.

“Slap the board” - Have Ss work in teams with some words: lu«n lu«n, thØnh tho¶ng, kh«ng bao giê, mét lÇn trong tuÇn, thêng xuyªn, hai lÇn mét tuÇn,.....

- Control and give feedback.

I.Warm up.

“Slap the board” Always Sometimes Often Usually Never Twice a week Once a week

2. Presentation -TM: Discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Be responsible for yourself and everyone.Love country II. Present simple tense T: retells the present simple tense and the S + V ( s, es ) way to do task.

Ss: listen and take note.

S + don’t / doesn’t + V Do / Does + S + V ?

Ss: practice in pairs.

1S: writes on the board.

T: correct their mistakes. – Ss: take note.

a. do-like-do-play-do-don’t b.

Does-does-likes-does-plays-doesdoesn’t c. Do-do-do-don’t T: reminds the way to use adverbs of III. Adverbs of Frequency frequence ( Slap the board ) Nh÷ng tr¹ng tõ chØ tÇn xuÊt: Ss: practice in pairs.

- always T: control and correct their mistakes.

- usually Ss: write the answer on the board. ( may be - often at home ) - sometimes - never a) I always watch television.

3. Practice -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

IV. Present progressive tense.

T: ask Ss to retell the present progressive tense.

What + is / am /are +S + doing ?

Ss: answer. Then do the exercise.

S + is /am / are + V – ing T: control and correct their mistakes.

- skip skipping Ss: take note.

- swim swimming - jog jogging a. am watching – playing – is swimming b. is cooking – aren’t – am reading c. am doing – am reading T: Reminds the way to use near future to make future plans.

Ss: remember and take note.

Ss: do exercise in groups T: control and correct their mistakes.

Ss: take note.

V. Future: “ going to” S + to be + going to + V ex:S1: What are you going to do ?

S2:I am going to play volleyball.

T: guide the way to do task.

Ss: write on the board.

T: comments and correct their mistakes.

Ss: take note.

a. They are going to play soccer . b. They are going to play tennis c. They are going to have a picnic . d. He is going to swim / to go swimming 1. I’m going to Sapa.

2. I’m going to go with my friends.

3. We’re going to go in the Spring.

4. The weather is cool.

5. We’re going to bring a camera.

6. We are going by train.

7. We’re going to stay in a hotel.

8. For 3 days.

9. We’re going to go camping. ......etc....

4.Further practice.

- Work individually. * Present progressive tense.

VI.Complete the dialogue - Give some cues and ask Ss makes Han: What are you going to do? sentences using present progressive tense.

Vui: I am going to visit Ha Noi. Eg: Hung / get up at 6 / get up at 7.

Han: Where are you going to stay?

S1: Hung usually gets up at six.

S2: That’s right, but today he is getting Vui: I am going to stay in a hotel. up at seven.

Han: How long are you going to say?

- Have Ss work in pairs.

Vui: I am going to stay for a week.

- Call some pairs to do in the class.

- go to school / go camping.

- have rice for lunch / have a bread.

- walk home / walk in the mountains.

- Have Ss do exercise 3. p 151.

Answer the questions * Future: Going to.

- Have Ss to remind how to use the future a. She is going to visit ha Noi. tense and form. b. She is going to stay in a hotel.

- Ask Ss to do the exercise 4. p. 151-152. c. She is going to stay for a week.

- Give feedback. * Future plans, the weather.

- Give some questions and ask Ss to VII. What is the weather like? answer them to write a passage.

- What is the weather like in the spring ?

It’s warm Planning a holiday.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Where are you going to go ?

Who are you going to go with ?

What season are you going to go in ?

What’s the weather like then ?

What are you going to bring with you ?

6. How are you going to travel ?

7. Where are you going to stay ?

8. How long are you going to stay ?

9. What are you going to do there ?

- Guide Ss to answer the questions then help them to write a passage about the “Planning holiday”.

Eg: I’m go to go to Sapa with my friends, Mai and Lan. We are going to go in the Spring. It’s cool then but we like cool weather. We’re going to bring warm clothes and with us and I’m going to bring my camera. We’re going to travel train. In Sapa we’re going to stay in a hotel for 3 days and we’re going to go camping.

We’re going to walk in the mountains and we’re going to go fishing. I’m going to take some photos.

- Give the correct passage.

5.Production T: guide the way to ask and answer about the weather and make future plans.

Ss: practice in pairs.

T: control and correct their mistakes.

Ss: may be take note at home.

T: Ask ss to ask and answer the questions on page 153.

Ss: Practice.

VIII. Future plans a. I’m going to do my homework. b. I’m going to have a picnic.

IX.Homework - Learn by heart structures again.

- Do the rest exercises.

- Prepare for the test.

Preparing date: 27/3/19 Teaching date: 3/4/19

week:31 Period:89 written test I. OBJECTIVES

1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to check themselves and do the tests better 2. Skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing 3. Attitude: - Students should revise the old lessons 4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, capacity to use language - Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.sensitive and responsible II. PREPARATIONS: 1.Teacher: copied papers, laptop 2.Students: pens III. MATRIX: IV. TEST

---------------------- o0o ---------------------

Week: 31 Period: 90

Unit 15 : countries Lesson 1: A- We are the world (A1-4)

Preparation date: 29/3 Teaching date : 5/4

II. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know some countries, Nationalities and languages vocabulary to talk about where people are from.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Love country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PRESENTATION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s & Students’ activities Contents 1. Warm up.

“Brain storming” - Have Ss write some names of the countries in the world in English or

I.Warm up.

“Brain storming”

Countries in the world

Vietnameses.

Countries in the world

Vietnam

Japan

Vietnam

Japan

Italy

Italy

- Control and give feedback.

2.Presentation -TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Love country T: set the situation. Then play the tape one time.

Ss: listen and find out new words.

T: give new words.

Ss: guess the meaning and take note. Then listen and repeat - practice.

T: control and correct their mistakes.

T: play the tape .

Ss: listen and read in silent. Then practice.

T: control and correct their mistakes.

3.Practice -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Love country T: guide the way to introduce oneself and others, using the following structures.

Ss: Try to take part in practicing how to introduce oneself, using the cues given.

T: control and correct their mistakes.

Then introduce the Wh-question and the way to answer.

Ss: Notice the new structures given by the teacher.

Ss: practice in pairs asking and answering

II. Listen and repeat: 1.Vocabulary - world : thÕ giíi - country : ®Êt níc - nationality : quèc tÞch - language : ng«n ng÷ - Japan- Japanese : NhËt - China- Chinese : Trung Quèc - Australia- Australian : Uc - Great Britain- British : Anh - Canada- Canadian : Cana®a - Vietnam- Vietnamese: ViÖt nam

2. Grammar: Ex1: Where are you from?

I`m from Viet Nam. Ex2: Where is he from?

He’s from Japan.

Where+ tobe + S+ from? + tobe+ and from+name 2.SListen read of the country.

about the places they come from.

Ss: read Minh’s introduction

ex: - My name is Minh. I am from Viet Nam.I speak Vietnamese.

T: Introduce new structure and ask some - Minh is from Viet Nam. He speaks more questions about Susan, Yoko , . . .

Vietnamese.

Ss: build up new sentences.

Which language do you speak? does he T: control and correct their mistakes.

I speak Vietnamese.

He speaks Which language do / does + S + speak ?

S + speak(s) + (language )

T: Introduce the way to ask and answer III. Listen and repeat.

- What’s your nationality? about nationality.

I’m Vietnamese Ss: take note & practice in pairs.

T: control and correct their mistakes.

What+ tobe+ your/ his/ her+ nationality ?

S + tobe + (nationality)

4.Further practice IV. Make dialogues. Practice with a - Have Ss make dialogues use the table in partner. exercise 3. (A4) Thu: Who’s that?

- Model with a good student.

Chi: That’s …Susan………

Eg: T: Who’s that ?

Thu: Where is he/she from?

S: That’s Minh.

Chi: He’s / She’s from…Great Britain…

Thu: What’s his/her nationality?

T: Where is he from?

Chi: He’s / She’s …British…………

S: He is from Vietnam.

Thu: Which language does he/she speak?

T: What’s his nationality ?

Chi: He/She speaks ....English ........

S: He is Vietnamese.

T: Which language does he speak ?

S: He speaks Vietnamese.

- Get Ss to work in pairs.

- Let Ss have time to practice.

- Call some pairs to practice in the class 5.Production V. Homework T: review the main points.

- Learn by heart new words and structures.

Ss: listen and remember.

- Do the rest exercises.

- Learn by heart new words and structures.

- Prepare for the next period.

- Do the rest exercises.

- Prepare for the next period.

-------------------------------o0o-----------------------------Kiểm tra ngày 01 tháng 4 năm ……………………………………………………. …………………………………………………… …………………………………………………….. …………………………………………………….

Week: 32 Period: 91

Unit 15: COUNTRIES Lesson 2. a. (5-6) we are the world.

Preparation date:1/4 Teaching date : 8/4

II. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write a postcard about being on vacation.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone. Love country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PRESENTATION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher and students’ activities Contents 1.Warm up.

I.Warm up.

“Word cue drill” - Give instruction and check.

- Have Ss work in pairs .

- Model with a good student.

- Hoa / Vietnam - Tomiko / Japan - Li / China - Jo / Australia - John / Britain - Susan / Canada - Control and get feedback.

- Ask students to practice inpairs A4P156 2.Pre- writing -TM:Discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.Love country * Pre – teach newwords T: Shows Ss some postcards. Then set the situation.

T: Reads the postcard one time. Then give new words.

Ss: guess the meaning and take note. Then listen and repeat - practice.

T: control and correct their mistakes. * Ask and answer T : Gives some questions 1. Who’s the postcard from ?

2. Where is he ?

3. What’s the weather like ?

4. Is he traveling by train ?

5. What is he going to do tomorrow ?

6. Who’s the postcard to ?

“Word cue drill” - Hoa / Vietnam - Tomiko / Japan - Li / China - Jo / Australia - John / Britain - Susan / Canada Eg: S1: Where’s Hoa from ?

S2: She’s from Vietnam.

S1: What language does she speak?

S2: She speaks Vietnamese.

II.- A5. Write. Read this postcard from Nhan * New words - postcard ( n ): bu thiÕp - Tower of London ( n ): th¸p Lu©n §«n - wet ( adj ): Èm ít - interesting ( adj ): thó vÞ - be on vacation : ®i nghØ - a lot of = many: nhiÒu * Ask and answer 1. It’s from Nhan 2. He is in London 3. It’s cool and wet 4.No ( by bus ) 5. He’s going to visit the Tower of London 6. It’s to Minh

Teacher and students’ activities 7. Where is he ?

- Get Ss’anwers by reading aloud in the class.

- Give some interesting places in the world to the Ss for their writing.

- Japan / Tokyo / Mount Fujiama - Vietnam / Hue / The Citadel - The USA / New York / The statue of liberty - China / Beijing / The Great wall.

- Australia / Sydney / Bondi Beach.

- France / Paris / The Eiffel.

Ps : Answer T : Corrects and gives the answer - Give the postcard before class T : Corrects and remarks 3.While- writing -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and be responsible for yourself and everyone.

T: Explains how a postcard is written.

Ss: listen and remember.

T: ask Ss to write a postcard to Nhan from Minh.

Ss: Write a postcard as requested. ( work in groups ) (Use the model to rewrite) T: control and correct their mistakes. production

4.Post- writing T: ask Ss to practice asking and answering the following questions about themselves.

Ss: practice in pairs.

Contents 7. He is in Hanoi

*Write April th

20 2012 Dear Nhan , I am on vacation in Paris . The weather is cool and fine .

I’m travelling by car and visiting a lot of interesting places .

Tomorrow, I’m going to visit the Eiffel Tower Love , Minh III.- A6. Answer. Then write the answers in your notebook a. My name’s ..... b. I’m ...... ( years old ) c. I’m from Viet Nam

Teacher and students’ activities Ss: writes on the board.

T: correct their mistakes.

Ss: take note.

Ss: Practice in pairs.

T:Ask Sts to read the sentences in Remember

5.Production T: review the main points.

Ss: listen and take note name

country

Ask and answer about yourself

postcard wet Vocabulary

Unit 15: A5-7

How to write a postcard

- Learn by heart new words and structures.

- Write the rest exercises in your notebooks.

- Prepare for the next period.

Contents d. I speak Vietnamese. e. I go to Tan Moc school. f. I’m in grade 6.

A7. Remember Where are you from? – I’m from Viet Nam. - Where is he/she from? – He/She’s from Japan - Which language do you speak? - I speak Vietnamese.

- Which language does he/she speak? He/She speaks English.

IV. Homework T: ask Ss to: - Learn by heart new words and structures.

- Write the rest exercises in your notebooks.

- Prepare for the next period.

Ss: listen and take note.

Teacher and students’ activities Ss: listen and take note.

Week: 32 Period: 92

Contents

Unit 15:COUNTRIES Lesson 3. b. (1-4) cities, buildings and people .

Preparation date: 3/4 Teaching date : 10/4

II. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, students will be able to compare places using comparative and superlative adjectives of one syllable.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Love country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around, Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.…

II. PRESENTATION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES:

Teacher and students’ activities 1.Warm up.

Contents I..Warm up

“Matching” - Have Ss choose the adjectives which best describe the cities. A city can have more than one adjective.

“Matching” hot Hue small hot HCM city

Hue

Hoi An Sapa Hanoi cold Long Xuyen - Control and give feedback. wet

cold big

2.Presentation -TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and be responsible for yourself and everyone.

T: give new words by using pictures, giving examples, and explaining.

Ss: guess the meaning and take note. Then listen and repeat - practice.

T: control and correct their mistakes.

T: play the tape .

Ss: listen and repeat. Then practice.

T: control and correct their mistakes.

T: hangs pictures in which 3 things were drawn in 3 exactly different size on the board.

Ss: Look at the picture . Notice the different size of things presented.

T: set the situation. Then play the tape one time.

small wet cold

HCM city Hoi An

Hanoi cold Long Xuyen - Control and give feedback.

II-New word - building ( n ): toµ nhµ, cao èc - population ( n ): d©n sè - milion(n) : triÖu - point: ®iÓm, phÈy - capital(n): thñ ®« - capital city ( n ): thñ phñ

3.Practice -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and be responsible for yourself and everyone.

T: Introduce new grammar Ss: take note and base on the structure to give some examples.

T: control and correct their mistakes.

Ss: take note.

III- Listen and repeat: * Grammar a) So s¸nh h¬n cña tÝnh tõ short adjective + er ( S1 + tobe + adj_er + than + S2 )

Sapa big

T: Ask ss to compare the pictures on page 158.

Ss: Practice in pairs.

ex: big → bigger Ha Noi is smaller than HCM city b)So s¸nh nhÊt cña tÝnh tõ The short adjective + est ( S + tobe + the adj_est )

The short adjective + est ( S + tobe + the adj_est ) ex: big → the biggest HCMC is the biggest city in Viet Nam. * Note: + TÝnh tõ ng¾n lµ tÝnh tõ cã 1 ©m tiÕt hoÆc 2 ©m tiÕt tËn cïng lµ “y” + TÝnh tõ kÕt thóc lµ 1 phô ©m mµ tríc nã lµ mét nguyªn ©m th× ta ph¶i gÊp ®«i phô ©m cuèi råi míi thªm“ER” hoÆc “EST” Ex : big – bigger – biggest Tall – taller – tallest 4.Further practice T: set the situation B2/ page 159. Then play IV- Listen & read. Then answer the questions. the tape one time. * Answer questions Ss: listen and read in silent. Then practice.

T: control and correct their mistakes. Then a. No, it isn’t. Ho Chi Minh City is bigger than Ha Noi. guide the way to do task. b. Mexico City is the biggest city in the Ss: practice in pairs. world.

1S: writes on the board. c. Tokyo is bigger than London.

T: correct their mistakes.

Eg:a. What’s the tallest mountain in Ss: take note.

Vietnam ? a. Phanxipang b. The MeKong c. Hue d. Sapa e. HCM city f.

HaTinh 5.Production.

Answers given.

- Give some answers and have Ss to make the V. Homework questions.

T: ask Ss to: Eg:a. What’s the tallest mountain in Vietnam - Learn by heart new words and structures. ?

- Do the exercises in the exercise a. Phanxipang books. b. The MeKong - Prepare for the next period: Unit 15: c. Hue d. Sapa B3,4+ C3. e. HCM city Ss: listen and take notes. f. HaTinh T: review the main points.

Ss: listen and remember. the text about capitals

building

population

Vocabulary Unit 15: B1,2

Structures

comparetives

Adj +er

superlatives

the adj +est

Week: 32 Period: 93

Unit 15: COUNTRIES Lesson 4. c. (1-2) Natural features.

Preparation date: 5/4 Teaching date : 12/4

II. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use “Lots of....” as a quantifier with Geography vocabulary to describe Vietnam.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.Love country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PRESENTATION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher and students’ activities Contents 1.Warm up. “Slap the board” I.Warm up.

- Give instruction and check.

“Slap the board” - Have Ss play in teams.

- Give instruction and check.

- Give some words: beautiful, green, - Have Ss play in teams. fields, rivers, mountains, beaches, lakes.. - Give some words: beautiful, green, - Control and praise the winner. fields, rivers, mountains, beaches, lakes..

2.. Presentation -TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident T: Shows the map of Viet Nam to introduce some interesting places : Hue, Vung Tau, . . . Then play the tape one

time.

Ss: listen and find out new words.

T: give new words.

Ss: guess the meaning and take note.

Then listen and repeat - practice.

T: control and correct their mistakes.

II.. Listen and read * New words - forest ( n ): ( picture ) - desert ( n ) : ( ex ) - rain ( n ): ( translation ) - great: ( translation ) - lots of = many = a lot of

* Check Vocabulary: Rub out and rememder T: play the tape .

Ss: listen and read in silent. Then Model sentence : Model sentences. practice.

- Present the text C1.P 162-163 by T: control and correct their mistakes reading and listening the text.

Set the scene: Lan tells us about 6 natural features of Vietnam. What are they?

- Have Ss find out the sentences Lan introduce the natural features.

- Write the model on the board and ask Ss to repeat.

We have lots of mountains / rivers / forests / rain.

- Ask Ss to translate the model and give the form.

We have lots of mountains ./ rivers / lakes ………….

We don’t have any deserts *T/ F prediction : Lan is talking about five natural features – rivers , lakes , mountains , forests and rain * Complete the passage a. mountains b. rivers c, lakes d. rain e. forests f. beaches

g. deserts 3.. Practice -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and be responsible for yourself and everyone.

Ss: base on the text and the pictures to answer questions.

1S: writes on the board.

T: correct their mistakes Ss: take note.

T: guide the way to do task.

Ss: base on the model and the pictures to practice in pairs.

Ss: comment.

T: control and correct their mistakes.

Ss: take note ( some sentences ) 4 Further practice. * Picture drill.

- Have Ss look at the pictures again and practice ask and answer.

Eg: Does Vietnam have lots of [mountains] ?

Yes, it does / No, it doesn’t.

- Let Ss have time to practice.

- Have Ss work in pairs to ask and answer.

- Call some pairs to practice in the class. * True / False repetition drill.

- Give instruction and play with Ss. T: There are lots of beaches in Da Nang.

Ss: repeat There are lots of forests in Hanoi. silent There are lots of lakes in Hanoi repeat There are lots of mountains in

III.Practice . Look at the pictures again . Ask and answer ex: Does Viet Nam have any …… ?

Yes, it does. / No, it doesn’t a. Does Viet Nam have any mountains?

Yes, it does. b. Does Viet Nam have any rivers?

Yes, it does. ........................................

- Listen to.

- Whole class play with the teacher.

IV.Write My country is very beautiful and interesting. In Lai Chau there are lots of forests. In Can Tho there are lots of rivers and rice fields. In Hanoi there are lots of lakes. In Pleiku there are lots of mountains. In Da Nang there are lots of beautiful beaches. In Hue there’s lots of rain and in Quang Ninh there are lots of mountains and rice fields.

Da Lat.

repeat There are lots of fields in HCM city. silent There are lots of people in HCM city repeat There’s lots of rain in Vietnam. repeat There’s lots of rain in a desert. silent 5.Production Matching - Have Ss do the exercise in pairs.

Lai Chau Forests Can Tho beaches Hanoi mountains Pleiku rice fields Da Nang rivers Hue lakes Quang Ninh rain - Have Ss use the cues they’ve match to write a passage tell about the natural features in Vietnam. (if time is enough).

- Learn by heart vocabulary and structure.

- Translate the text into Vietnamese.

- Ask Ss to complete the passage C1. P 164 in their exercise book.

- Prepare next lesson. Unit 15 Lesson 5:C3

V.Homework.

- Learn by heart vocabulary and structure.

- Translate the text into Vietnamese.

- Ask Ss to complete the passage C1. P 164 in their exercise book.

- Prepare next lesson. Unit 15. Lesson 5:C3

-------------------------------o0o-----------------------------Kiểm tra ngày 8 tháng 4 năm ……………………………………………………. …………………………………………………… …………………………………………………….. …………………………………………………….

Week: 33 Period: 94

Unit 15. COUNTRIES Lesson 5. c. (3) Natural features.

Preparation date:10/4 Teaching date : 17/4

II. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read a text about the world’s great rivers and mountains to skim for details and get further practice in using comparatives and superlatives.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.Love country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PRESENTATION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III.Teaching methods: Communicative approach,slap the board ,picture drill,group work, game ,

III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s & Students’ activities 1. Warm up.

“Wordsquare” - Give instruction and check.

- Ask Ss play in two teams. r i v e r m g t a r e l b e a t r e e i e i r o n r g l o t s d l r o - Control and give feedback.

s t c g e s w

Contents I.Warm up.

w s h i g h x

c h i n a o f

r m e t e r s

i g l r i g d

“Wordsquare” v e r s t a r t b e a c e e i g r o n e l o t s l r o w

w s h i g h x

* Answer keys: great, long. meters, rain, high, China. river, starts, beach, tree, one, lots world, girl

2. Pre reading. (15’) -TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident II.Vocabulary Pre teach. (to) flow to (picture) (to) flow to (picture) the sea (picture) the sea (picture) North Africa : B¾c phi ch©u North Africa : B¾c phi ch©u Tibet : T©y T¹ng Tibet : T©y T¹ng Mediterranean Sea : §Þa Trung H¶i Mediterranean Sea : §Þa Trung H¶i Gulf of Tonkin : vÞnh B¾c Bé Gulf of Tonkin : vÞnh B¾c Bé * Checking: What and where. a. True / False prediction.

III.Listening - Have Ss read the statements and guess they - Listen and repeat. are T or F. - Ask Ss work individually.

- Guess the meanings.

- Let them have time to do.

- Copy the words.

- Have Ss share with their partners.

1. There are two great rivers in Vietnam.

2. The Red river is longer than the MeKong river.

3. The Red river and the Mekong both

c h i n a o f

start in China.

- Work individually.

4. The longest river in the world is not in Vietnam.

- Share with their partners.

5. Phanxipang is the highest mountain in the world.

2. Get Ss’answers.

- Give their guess.

3. While reading. (10’) -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and be responsible for yourself and everyone.

- Ask Ss to read the text and check their III.Reading - Read the text and check their guess. prediction.

1. T - Have Ss correct the false statements.

2. F (The Mekong river is longer) 3. F (The Mekong river starts in Tibet) 4. T 5. F (in Vietnam) Ask and answer the questions in pairs. * Comprehension Questions.

- Have Ss read the text again and work in pairs */ Answer the questions a. The Mekong river is the longest river in to ask and answer the questions.

Eg: T. Which is the longest river in Vietnam ? Vietnam . b. It starts in Tibet .

S. The Mekong river. c. The Nile is the longest river in the - Call on some pairs to practice in the class.

- Control and give feedback. world . d. It flows to the Mediterranean Sea e. Mount Everest is the highest mountain in the world . f . Phanxipang is the highest mountain in Vietnam .

- Listen and work individually.

- Share with their partners.

- Write on the board.

4. Post reading. (10’) * Write it up.

- Write some numbers on the board and get Ss to give the information about the numbers.

6,437 / 8,848 1,200 / 3,143

Eg: The Nile river is 6,437 kilometers long.

- Ask Ss work individually.

- Share with their partners.

- Go to the board and write.

- Control and give feedback. * Ask Ss some questions about their country.

3. In your country, which is the biggest lake ?

4. Which is the highest tower ?

5. Which is the longest river in your country ?

5. Production - Learn by heart vocabulary and translate the text into Vietnamese.

- Answer the questions in the notebook.

- Prepare next lesson.

Unit 16. Man and The Environment.

Lesson1. A. Animals and plants. (1-2).

Week:33 Period:95

IV.Homework.

- Learn by heart vocabulary and translate the text into Vietnamese.

- Answer the questions in the notebook.

- Prepare next lesson.

Unit 16. Man and The Environment.

Lesson1. A. Animals and plants. (1-2).

Preparing date: 12/4/19 Teaching date:19/4/19 FEEDBACK ON TEST 45’

I./. OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: After getting back the test papers, students will be able to evaluate their knowledge and have a plan for the next time 2. Skills: To correct Ss’ errors if necessary 3. Attitude: - To give Ss the motivation to learn hard for their exam - Students know how to learn English in right way.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.Love country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,‌ II./.PREPARATION: 1.Teacher: test 45’ 2.Students: notebooks III./.PROCEDURE: 1- Warm up - How are you today?

- Are you ready for getting back the test papers?

2- Teacher's idea * Priority: - Ss do the part " choose the best answer " and writing well.

- Ss try their best to get good marks.

- Ss know how to do the test, present well, true request.

- Ss understand vocabularies, language focus. *Defect: - Some Ss have many mistakes about using vocabularies.

- Some Ss have many mistakes about writing sentences, using structure.

- Some Ss have many mistakes about showing.

- Some Ss copy other exams 3- Pay the test paper back to ss - Ss look at the tests and do the tests again by themselves.

- Ss find their mistakes by themselves.

- Ss share and compare with a partners.

-T asks Ss to work in pairs +S1 corrects mistakes of S2's test + S2 corrects mistakes of S1's test - T calls - Ss answer one by one 4- T gives ss the answer key -T: Gives the aims of the exercise from the test.

-Ss: Listen -T: Asks Ss to give the answers they did.

-Ss: Give the answers they did or write on board -T: Gives the correct answers.

-Ss: Listen and correct the mistakes -T: Explains some knowledge and the answers 1. Key: 0,25 p for each correct sentences

Sentence

Key

Sentence

Key

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

T F T T B C A C D B D D A C C B

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

A B C A F F T F C B B C A C A A

WRITE:.Write at least 6 sentences about yourself: 0.3 p for each correct sentences (Tape: Unit 14 -A4) - Spend time with students to ask questions about their tests, their points.

- T asks Ss write key in notebook and correct their mistakes by themselves.

5-Production: - Redo the test in the notebook - Prepare new lesson ----------------------@0@-------------------

Week: 34 Period: 96

Unit 16. man and the environment Preparation date:15/4 Lesson 1. a. (1 -3) animals and Teaching date : 22/4 plants.

I. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know countable and uncountable quantifiers: a lot, a little, a few to talk about food.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone. Love family and country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PRESENTATION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher and students’ activities Contents 1. Warm up.

I.Warm up.

“Jumbled words”

- Give instruction and check.

- Let Ss play in two teams.

- toespota = - gegs = - motatoes = - ierc = - werlofs = - tableveges = - Control and get feedback.

- Praise the winner.

“Jumbled words”

- toespota - gegs - motatoes - ierc - werlofs - tableveges * Answers: - potatoes - eggs - tomatoes - rice - flowers - vegetables

= = = = = =

2. Pre-listening -TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.Love family, friends and II. Newwords: country - a few: mét vµi, vµi - a little: mét Ýt ex:How much rice is there?

There is some rice a lot of / lots of rice a little rice

- Use the picture to introduce the context -Give some questions -Ss: look at the pictures and answer.

-Write the questions and the answers on the board.

-Explain and give structures -Ss: listen and copy.

ex:How many eggs are there?

There are some eggs a lot of / lots of eggs a few eggs * Notes + some / a lot of / lots of / a little + N (kh«ng ®Õm ®îc) + some / a lot of / lots of / a few + N ( ®Õm ®îc sè nhiÒu) + A few, Alittle mang nghÜa kh¼ng ®Þnh; few, little mang nghÜa phñ ®Þnh.

3.While – listening -TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.Love family, friends and III.Practice: Matching (A 3) country -Let Ss look at the pictures of A 3 on page 167 and * Answer key: 1.d 2.f 3.b 4.a 5.c 6.e do the matching while listening.

-Ss: work individually.

-T: give correct answers Ask Sts to listen and write the letter of the picture under the right heading * Tapescript : 1. There are a lot of vegetables.

2. There are some flowers.

3. There are a few tomatoes.

4. There are a lot of potatoes.

5. There are a few onions .

6. There is a little rice.

Give feedback 4. Post – listening Ask Sts to desribe each picture , using a lot of , lots of , many , much , some , a few , a little …………and then dictation .

* / Describe each picture - There are a lot of vegetables .

- There are some flowers .

*/ Hold a game : Chain game

5.Production T: review the main points.

Ss: listen and remember.

Ask Sts to study vocab + exercises in the exercie book Make sentences with each quantifier .

- There are a few tomatoes .

- There are a lot of potatoes .

- There are a few onions .

- There is a little rice . */ Play chain game Eg : S1 : There’s a little rice .

S 2 : There’s a little rice and some tomatoes S3 : There’s a little rice , some tomatoes and a few eggs S4 : etc ………….

IV. Homework Ask Sts to study vocab + exercises in the exercie book Make sentences with each quantifier .

Week: 34 Period: 97

Unit 16. man and the environment Preparation date: 17/4 Lesson 2 a. (2) animals and plants. Teaching date : 24/4

I. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read a text about farmimg and getting further practice in a lot , a little , a few .

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Love family and country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around, Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.…

II. PRESENTATION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher and students’ activities Contents 1. Warm up.

“Matching” - Ask student to look at the pictures and listen to the tape and match the words “Matching” - Give instruction and check.

- Have Ss play in two teams.

The population rõng forests trång The world c¸nh ®ång farmer d©n sè (to) grow con vËt fields n«ng d©n food thøc ¨n animals thÕ giíi

I. Warm up.

“Matching” - Ask student to look at the pictures and listen to the tape and match the words “Matching” - Give instruction and check.

- Have Ss play in two teams.

The population rõng forests trång The world c¸nh ®ång farmer d©n sè (to) grow con vËt fields n«ng d©n food thøc ¨n animals

- Control and praise the winner

thÕ giíi - Control and praise the winner

2.Pre-reading -TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and be responsible for yourself and everyone.

- Explain some new words by using II-Vocabulary pictures, translation -a buffalo (pict): con trâu Ss : listen and copy down - repeat -to grow (act/pict): trồng mọc -to produce (trans) -to plow (trans / pict) :cày -pull a cart (trans) : xe bò -a dog (pict) :con chó -a cat (pict) : con mèo -a cow (pict): con bò cái -an animal (example) - Play the tape again and get Ss to repeat III- Reading ( chorus – individual) a. Open prediction Ss : do as directed What does Mr Hai have?

-Ss: predict 6 things Mr Hai has on his What does Mr Hai produce? farm and five things he produces -Give feedback 3.While-reading -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Love family, friends and country - Have Ss read the text and check their prediction -Give answer key

b. Checking prediction *Mr Hai has: 1.paddy field 2.a small vegetable field 3.fruit trees 4.buffalo 5.cows 6.chickens * Mr Hai produces: 1.rice 2.vegetables 3.fruit 4.milk 5.

-Ask Ss to practice in pairs to ask and answer the questions Ss : do as directed -T give correct answers.

4.Post reading.

eggs c.Comprehentsion Questions : a.He produces of rice b.Yes, he does c.He produces a little fruit d.They produce a little milk e.They produce a lot of eggs.

“Retell”

- Ask Ss use the cues in “ordering” to retell the text in their own words.

Eg: The population of the world is growing.....

- Have Ss work in groups.

- Go around and help Ss with their ideas.

- Have some Ss present on board.

- Control and correct.

5.Production: - Remind the model sentences Ss : listen - Show the picture and make questions -Ss answer

Week: 34 Period: 98

IV.Homework.

- Learn by heart vocab.

- Translate the text into Vietnamese.

- Do exercises in workbook.

- Prepare next lesson. Unit 16.

Lesson 4. B1.

Unit 16. man and the environment Preparation date:19/4 Lesson 3. b. (1) Pollution Teaching date : 26/4

II. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read a text about pollution for vocabulary and to understand ideas.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.Love family and country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PRESENTATION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher and students’ activities

Contents

1.Warm up.

I. Warm up.

“Slap the board”

“Slap the board”

- Give instruction and check.

- Have Ss play in two teams.

- Give some words and have Ss play with them: c©y, ph¸ huû, s¶n xuÊt, con vËt, mèi nguy hiÓm, ®Êt ®ai, ®èt ch¸y, ....

- Control and praise the winner.

- Introduce new lesson: In this lesson we continue learning some more environmental problems.

- Give instruction and check.

- Have Ss play in two teams.

- Give some words and have Ss play with them: c©y, ph¸ huû, s¶n xuÊt, con vËt, mèi nguy hiÓm, ®Êt ®ai, ®èt ch¸y, ....

- Control and praise the winner.

2.Pre- reading -TM: Play game, practising -C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made.Love family, friends and country - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in B1- P. 169.

- Introduce some new words: - Explain some new words by using pictures, translating.

Ss : listen and copy down - repeat

* Check Vo: R & R

II. New words + environment ( n): m«i trêng + (to) pollute- pollution: « nhiÔm + wild (a): hoang d· + (to) waste: l·ng phÝ + coal (n): than ®¸ + gas (n): khÝ ®èt + power (n): ®iÖn + ocean(n) : biÓn ®¹i d¬ng

T: play the tape and ask sts listen one time Ss : listen - Play the tape again and get Ss to repeat ( chorus – individual) Ss : do as directed - Remind the progressive tense Ss: Listen and copy

* Model sentences We are destroying the forests.

S + is / am / are + V- ing + . . .

-Have Ss guess and answer the questions.

-Give feedback 3. While- reading -TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

Love family, friends and country - Call some Ss to read the passage again.

- Ask Ss to answer the questions in B1P.170.

- Call some Ss to read their answers aloud.

- Comment and give correct answers. a. Because we are destroying the forests. b. Gases are polluting the air. c. The pollution comes from gases and trash. d. Trash is polluting the land, rivers and oceans.

4.Post reading “Write it up” - Ask Ss use the predict pre questions to make a list things from their village to affect the environment.

III.Pre-questions a.What are we destroying? We are destroying forests, wild animals and plants b.What are we wasting? We are wasting water, power (coal, oil, gas) c.What are we polluting? We are polluting the air, the land, the rivers, and the oceans.

3/Comprehension questions * Answers: a. Because we are destroying the forests. b. The burning of coal, oil and gas is polluting the air. c.The pollution comes from our production of too much trash and our burning of oil, coal and gas. d. Our production of too much trash is polluting the land, the rivers and the oceans IV.Practice in the class.

We are destroying our environment !

We are destroying the forests.

We are destroying the wild animals We are destroying the plants We are wasting water

We are destroying our environment.

Eg: (from What are we destroying?) (from What are we wasting?)

- Have Ss work individually - Control and correct.

5.Production - Learn by heart vocab.

- Translate the text into Vietnamese.

- Do exercises in workbook.

- Prepare next lesson. Unit 16.

Lesson 5. B2.

We are wasting power We are polluting the air We are polluting the land We are polluting the rivers We are polluting the oceans - Listen and copy.

Unit 16. man and the environment Lesson 4. b. (2) Pollution

Preparation date: 2 / 5 Teaching date : 11 / 5

Week: 34 Period:99 II. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the rules about protecting the environment.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.Love family and country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PRESENTATION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s & Students’ activities Contents

1. Warm up.

Brainstorming: The rules to protect environment - Give instruction and check.

- Have Ss play in two teams.

Eg: Don’t produce trash Don’t waste water - Control and praise the winner.

1. Warm up.

Brainstorming: The rules to protect environment * Possible: Don’t destroy the plants Don’t waste water Don’t waste power Don’t pollute the air Don’t pollute the land Don’t pollute the rivers Don’t pollute the oceans ...ect...

2. Presentation.

-TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.Love family, friends and country - Listen and call out the words.

II.Vocab.

- Elicit the words from Ss. - Choral repetition - (to) throw - Individual repetition - (to) pick - (to) damage - (to) keep off - (to) save - (to) collect * Checking: Matching. * Checking: Matching.

Model sentences III.Model sentences - Have Ss look at the pictures and - Have Ss look at the pictures and sentences on page 170. sentences on page 170. + Don’t throw trash on the street. + Don’t throw trash on the street. + Keep off the grass. + Keep off the grass. * Concept check: meaning, use and form - Have Ss match the rules with these signs.

- Control and get feedback 3. Practice -TM: Play game, practising, discussion

group -C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

- Listen and call out the words.

- Choral repetition “Picture drill” - Have Ss look at the pictures and - Individual repetition practice speaking.

- Translate the model Eg: a. Don’t throw trash on the street.

- Look at the pictures and listen.

-Let Ss have time to practice.

- Work in pairs.

-Call on some Ss practice in the class. * Answers: - Control and correct. a - Picture c e - Picture e b - Picture f f - Picture b c - Picture a g - Picture g d - Picture h h - Picture d 4. Further practice “Write it up” - Ask Ss to work in group to answer the question: What would you do to protect the environment of your house or your school?

Eg: Don’t throw the trash into the river - Have Ss work in groups - Ask Ss to write on board.

- Control and correct.

5.Production - Learn by heart vocab.

- Do exercises in workbook.

- Prepare next lesson.

Unit 16: Lesson 5 B4-5

- Listen and copy.

- Choral and individual repetition.

-Work individually.

- Share with their partners. * Answers: - Look at the verbs and individually.

- Share. * Possible: Don’t destroy the plants.

Save water.

Don’t pollute the air.

Don’t cut down trees.

Don’t throw trash on the street. ....ect...

- Listen and copy.

-------------------------------o0o----------------------------Kiểm tra ngày tháng năm

work

……………………………………………………. …………………………………………………… …………………………………………………….. …………………………………………………….

Unit 16. man and the environment Week: 36 Preparation date: 29 /4 Lesson 5. b. (4-5) Pollution Period: Teaching date : 6 /5 100 II. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use should and shouldn’t for giving advice about protecting the environment.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing

3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Love family and country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around, Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.…

II. PRESENTATION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s & Students’ activities Contents 1.Warm up.

I.Warm up.

- Ask students to answer the question - Ask students to answer the question What would you do to protect the What would you do to protect the environment of your house or your environment of your house or your school? school?

2. Presentation.

-TM: Play game, practising -C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made . Love family, friends and country - Listen and call out the words.

II. Vocab. + should ( situation) + shouldn’t (anonym) - Choral repetition + recycle ( example) - Individual repetition +feed ( example) +empty (mine) +use (example) +pigs (picture) +soap metal III. Model sentences b. Model sentences -Elicit the model sentences from listening We should collect paper. and reading the dialogues .

We shouldn’t throw trash on the street - Listen and copy.

We should collect paper.

We shouldn’t throw trash on the street. - Choral and individual repetition.* Concept check: meaning, use and form Translate the model.

Form: S + should / shouldn’t + V (inf).....

Use: Give advice - Work individually.

- Share with their partners.

3. Practice -TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

Love family, friends and country IV.Practice * Answers: “Picture drill” - Have Ss look at the pictures and a. We shouldn’t damage trees. practice speaking. b. We should save water.

Eg: a. We shouldn’t damage trees. c. We shouldn’t throw trash on the street. b. We should save water.

-Let Ss have time to practice.

-Call on some Ss practice in the class.

- Control and correct.

4. Further practice “Write it up” - Ask Ss to make sentences with the verbs: damage, destroy, save, pollute, cut down, throw, waste, collect, pick

d. We should collect bottles and cans. e. We should keep off the grass. f. We shouldn’t pick flowers. g. We should collect paper. h. We shouldn’t throw trash in the country.

- Look at individually.

- Share. * Possible:

the

verbs

and

work

Eg: We shouldn’t [damage trees] - Answer the questions: What should/ should you in your We shouldn’t destroy the plants.

We should save water. home to protect the environment?

- Have Ss work individually We shouldn’t pollute the air.

We shouldn’t cut down trees.

- Ask Ss to write on board.

We shouldn’t throw trash on the street.

- Control and correct. ....ect...

5. Production - Learn by heart vocab.

- Listen and copy.

- Do exercises in workbook.

- Prepare next lesson.

Grammar Practice

Week: 36 Period: 101

Preparation date: 1 /5 Teaching date : 8 /5

Grammar practice

II. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, students will be able to further practice in present simple and progressive, comperatives and superlatives, quantifiers and countability: countries, natural features, farming and environment vocabulary.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.Love family and country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PRESENTATION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher and students’ activities 1.

Warm up.

Contents 1. Warm up.

“Networks”

“Networks”

- Give instruction and check.

- Have Ss play in two teams.

- Give instruction and check.

- Have Ss play in two teams.

Countries and languages

China Vietnam

English

- Control and praise the winner.

Countries and languages

China Vietnam

English

- Control and praise the winner.

2. Presentation -TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Love family, friends and country Help Sts do the exercises in the text book Help Sts review tenses of verbs note the differences between 2 tenses + s, es + is + Ving Comparison Indefinite quantifiers

3.Practice -TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.Love family, friends and country Ask Sts to do the exercises Write the answers in your exercise book.

Have Ss fill the blanks with the right comparation of adjectives from the table -Give feedback -Correct.

-Let Ss recall out the grammr.

-T: write them on the board.

I/ Review 1/Present simple S + V ( s, es ) 2/Present progressive tense S + be + v- ing 3/ Comparison S + be + adj – er + than + n S + be + the + adj –est + ( n) 4/ Indefinite quantifiers : a lot of , lots of , a few , a little .

Eg : a few books , a lot of books , lots of books A little rice , a lot of rice , lots of rice

II.Practice 1. Present simple tense. a. Do, speak, don’t, speak. b. speaks. c. speaks, chinese. d. spaks Japanese. e. Speaks VietNamese. f. Speaks English.

-Have Ss complete the short paragraph in groups -Give feedback Correct Ask Sts to read the right sentences again

4.Further practice “Mapped dialogue” ..........name? .....live? ....stay now? ....do?

What....teach? ...teach you?

.....Susan ......London ......Hanoi .....teacher ....English ...No...Mr Hai

2. Present simple and present progressive tense. a. is b. lisves c. is, is staying d. is e. does, teaches f. does, teach, doesn’t ; teaches 3. Adjective : Comparaties and superlatives long | longer | the longest short | shorter | the shortest tall | taller | the tallest small | smaller | the smallest big | bigger | the biggest high | higher | the highest a. longer ; the longest b. t he longest c. the tallest, taller, the tallest. d. The biggest, bigger, the biggest, the biggest.

4. Indefinite quantifers ( a few, a little, a lot of / lots of ) a lot a little a few a lot lots a lot “Mapped dialogue” S1: What’s her name?

S2: Her name’s Susan.

S1: Where does she live?

S2: She lives in London.

S1: Where is she staying now?

S2: She is staying in Hanoi.

S1: What does she do?

S2: She is a teacher.

What does she teach?

S2: She teaches English.

*Adjectives:Comperativesand superlaties.

- Have Ss remind how to form comperatives and superlaties.

- Ask them to go on board to write some adjectives that they have leart in two ways.

Eg: long longer the longest Short shorter the shortest ...ect.... *A few, A little, A lot / lots of.

- Ask Ss to remind - Write on board.

A few, a lot / lots of + Count N A little, a lot / lots of + Uncount N 5.Production T: Ask Sts to make comparison about Sts and things in the classroom .

Ss: Practice T: Ask Sts to make sentences about a few , a lot of , lots of , a little Ss: Do as teacher asked.

S1: Does she teach you ?

S2: No, she doesn’t. Mr Hai does - Remind.

S + be + adj –er + than......

S + be + the adj-est + than......

- Listen and write.

Week: 36 Preparation date: 3 /5 Revision 1 Period: Teaching date : 10 /5 102 II. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , Sts can practice using : - Present simple tense / present progressive tense/ future with be going to - Wh- questions : What color / how / how much / how many - Indefinite quantifiers ( a lot of, lots of , a little, a few , some , any ) - Vocab : parts of the body , colors , adj , food and drink 2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.Love family and country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PRESENTATION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher and students’ activities 1.Warm-up: Ask Sts to find words about parts of the body , colors , food and drink * / Find words - food and drink : water , milk , juice , wine , beer , meat , beef , rice , carrot , pea , bean , cake …….

- colors : white , black , red , blue , …….

- parts of the body : eyes , ears , mouth , hand , leg , nose ……….

Contents I.Warm-up: Ask Sts to find words about parts of the body , colors , food and drink * / Find words - food and drink : water , milk , juice , wine , beer , meat , beef , rice , carrot , pea , bean , cake …….

- colors : white , black , red , blue , …….

- parts of the body : eyes , ears , mouth , hand , leg , nose ……….I. Grammar:

2.Presentation -TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.Love family, friends and country II.Present simple tense Ask Sts to repeat the form of each tense and S + V ( s, es )

give examples .

Eg : I go to school by bike every day .

He goes to school by bus .

They are going to school by bus now .

She is going to visit Hue this summer vacation .

Ask Sts to repeat Wh – question and quantifiers .

III.Practice -TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone. Love family, friends and country Ask Sts to do the exercises in the photo .

Ask Sts to compare the answers with a partner .

Ex1: Give the correct form of the verbs 1- He ( listen) to music now 2- Lan usually ( watch) TV in the evening 3- What you ( do) tonight?

4- We should ( save) water 5- Don't (waste) oil 6- Can you (drive) a car?

7- Where he (come) from?

8- He (speak) Chinese?

9- They (not) visit Hue next week 10- Let's (go ) to the zoo Ex2: Make the questions for these answers

*/ Present progressive S + be + V – ing * / Future S + be going to + V * / Question - How many + DTDD + be + there ?

There + be + a few ….+ N s - How much + DTKDD + Be + there ?

There is + a little ….+ N What color is it ? It is red How do you feel ?

I’m tired .

III.Exercises Key Ex1 : 1. is listening 2. watches 3. are you going to do 4. save 5. waste 6. drive 7. does he come from ?

8 . Does he speak Chinese ?

9. are not going to visit 10 . go

4.Further practice Ex 2 .

1. Where are you from ?

2. How much meat do you want ?

3. How many students are there ?

4. What would you like to drink ?

5. How much is it ?

6. What are you going to do next week ?

Ex 3 .

1. I’m from Vietnam 2. I speak Vietnamese .

3. yes , please .

4. It is blue 5. I need two kilos 6. There are four people

Ex 2 .

1- I'm from France 2- I want 2 kilos of meat 3- There are 20 students 4- Soda, please 5- It's 2000 dong 6- I'm going to Hue next week Ex3: Answer the questions 1- Where are you from?

2- What languages do you speak?

3- Would you like some tea?

4- What color is your bike ?

5- How much beef do you need ?

6 - How many peaple are there in your family?

5.Production IV.Homework.

Ask Sts to read the right sentences again .

- Learn by heart vocab.

T: review the main points.

- Do exercises in workbook Ss: listen and remember.

- Prepare next lesson Ask Sts to learn by heart the vocab , grammar .

Prepare for the next lesson .

- Adverbs of frequency - Suggestions - Weather , season , pastime - Sports -------------------------------o0o-----------------------------Kiểm tra ngày 6 tháng 5 năm ……………………………………………………. …………………………………………………… …………………………………………………….. …………………………………………………….

Week: 37 Period: 103

Revision 2

Preparation date: 6 /5 Teaching date : 13 /5

I. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , Sts will be able to practice using : Adverbs of frequency Suggestions , Weather , season , pastime , Sports , Indefinite quantifiers ( a lot of, lots of , a little, a few , some , any 2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.Love family and country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PRESENTATION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES:

Teacher and students’ activities 1. Warm-up: Hold a game : brainstorming Ask Sts to find as many words as possible about sports , weather , season * / Find words - weather : hot , cold . cool , warm , rainy , sunny , humid …………

- season : spring , summer , autumn , winter - sports : soccer , tennis , basketball , badminton ……….

2.Presentation -TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

Love family, friends and country Ask Sts to repeat the position of adverbs in the sentence . the way to make suggestions , the use of quantifiers , how long ?

Ask Sts to copy these into the notebook .

Contents I.Warm-up: Hold a game : brainstorming Ask Sts to find as many words as possible about sports , weather , season * / Find words - weather : hot , cold . cool , warm , rainy , sunny , humid …………

- season : spring , summer , autumn , winter - sports : soccer , tennis , basketball , badminton ……….

IIGrammar: */ Adverbs of frequency .

Always – usually – often – sometimes – never Before V after be Eg: He is always free on Sunday .

He often goes fishing on Sunday . */ Asking about the weather What is the weather like in Hanoi today ?

It is hot …………..

What + is + the weather + like ?

It is + adj */ Making suggestions - Let’s + V - Why don’t we + V ?

- What about + V-in g ? */ - Indefinite quantifiers ( a lot of, lots of , a little, a few , some , any )

3. Practice -TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present‌.

-C: Co-operation, communication,‌ -Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.Love family, friends and country III.Exercises Ask Sts to do the exercises in the photo Key : .

Ex 1 .

Ask Sts to compare the answers with a partner .

Ex1 .Put the adverbs into the correct position 1.I am busy on weekdays ( always) 2.Do you read a newspaper in the morning? ( often) 3.Lan listens to music in her freetime. ( usually) 4.Where does she has breakfast? ( sometimes) 5.I am free everynight ( always) 6. Minh goes fishing ( nevert) Ex 2 : Fill in the blank with a few/ a little/ lot of/ lots of 1.I would like some coffee , and I like .......................... sugar in it.

2. A ..............of friends will join us to go to Hue. 3. I have .................of time to look after the children.

4. The windows are so small that the room gets ......................air.

5. The village is very small . There are only................................. houses.

6 . There are a .....................of eggs in the fridge.

7. I know you have........................

1. am always 2. often read 3. usually listens 4. sometimes have 5. am always 6 . Never goes

Ex 2 : Fill in the blank with a few/ a little/ lot of/ lots of Ex 2 1. a little 2. lot 3. lots 4. a little 5. a few 6. lot 7. a little 8 . a few

money.

8. We have .......................days for holiday.

Ex 3 4.Further practice Ex 3 : Rewrite sentences so that the meaning does not change .

1. What about walking to school ?

Why …………?

2.It`s often hot in the summer.

It`s never ………………

3. Why don’t we have a picnic ?

What …………………?

4. Let’s go swimming Why………….?

5. What about cleaning the board ?

Let’s ……………………?

5.Production Ask Sts to read the right sentences again T: review the main points.

Ss: listen and remember.

Ask Sts to learn by heart the vocab , grammar .

Prepare for the next lesson : The second term test.

1. Why don’t we walk to school ?

2. It`s never cold in the summer.

3. What about having a picnic ?

4. Why don’t we go swimming ?

5. Let’s clean the board .

IV. Homework.

- Learn by heart vocab.

- Do exercises in workbook - Prepare for the test

Week: 34 Period: 104

THE SECOND EXAM

Preparation date: 20 / 4 Teaching date : 27 /4

II. OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the test, Students will be able to review the vocabulary about sports and pastime; weather and seasons; vacation details and structure about present simple; present progressive; future plans to do the test fluently.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone. Love family and country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PRESENTATION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III.MATRIX

P

Week: 37 Period: 105 I. OBJECTIVES:

CORRECT THE EXAM

Preparation date: 8 /5 Teaching date : 15 /5

1.Knowledge - Help Ss to check their doing in tests & help them to review the knowledge.

-Give some remarks about the test so that students will be able to gain some experiences for their study and for the next time .

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Love family and country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PRESENTATION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES:

Week:37 Period:105 I./. OBJECTIVES:

Preparing date: 8/5/19 Teaching date:15/5/19 FEEDBACK ON EXAM

1. Knowledge: After getting back the test papers, students will be able to evaluate their knowledge and have a plan for the next time 2. Skills: To correct Ss’ errors if necessary 3. Attitude: - To give Ss the motivation to learn hard for their exam - Students know how to learn English in right way.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Love family and country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II./.PREPARATION: 1.Teacher: test 45’ 2.Students: notebooks III./.PROCEDURE: 1- Warm up - How are you today?

- Are you ready for getting back the test papers?

2- Teacher's idea * Priority: - Ss do the part " choose the best answer " and writing well.

- Ss try their best to get good marks.

- Ss know how to do the test, present well, true request.

- Ss understand vocabularies, language focus. *Defect: - Some Ss have many mistakes about using vocabularies.

- Some Ss have many mistakes about writing sentences, using structure.

- Some Ss have many mistakes about showing.

- Some Ss copy other exams 3- Pay the test paper back to ss - Ss look at the tests and do the tests again by themselves.

- Ss find their mistakes by themselves.

- Ss share and compare with a partners.

-T asks Ss to work in pairs +S1 corrects mistakes of S2's test + S2 corrects mistakes of S1's test - T calls - Ss answer one by one 4- T gives ss the answer key

-T: Gives the aims of the exercise from the test.

-Ss: Listen -T: Asks Ss to give the answers they did.

-Ss: Give the answers they did or write on board -T: Gives the correct answers.

-Ss: Listen and correct the mistakes -T: Explains some knowledge and the answers Key: - Spend time with students to ask questions about their tests, their points.

- T asks Ss write key in notebook and correct their mistakes by themselves.

5-Production: - Redo the test in the notebook - Prepare new lesson

Week: 20 Period: 55

UNIT 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY Lesson 1 : A1

Preparation date:2/1/2019 Teaching date : 9/1/2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , students will be able to use: The simple past tense to talk about past activities and talk about Liz’s holiday in Nha Trang.

They can write the verbs in the past tense: regular verbs and irregular verbs .

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: T’s and Ss’ activities Contents * Questions for the recent semester : 1- Warm-up : - Some questions about their study in the - How do you feel about your result at the first semester ? first semester .

- Do you want to get higher grade in this semester ?

- Ask them something about Nha Trang - Do you ever go / visit Nha Trang ?

- Where is Nha Trang ?

2- Presentation : -TM: Play game, practising -C: capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident a, Act 1 ( Pre-teach new words) A1- Listen then practice : example a, New words example - wonderful ( a ) = great : Tuyệt vời example - delicious ( a ) = tasty : ngon translation - friendly (a ) : thân thiện, translation -tired (a ) : mệt mỏi - Check: What and Where -Aquarium (n) : bể cá -gift (n) : quà tặng. b, Act 2 (Present new grammar : The b, The simple past tense : 1

simple past tense ) - Give examples

* Simple past tense of : tobe Eg: - It is cold today .

- It was cold yesterday .

Note : I , she , he , it + was We , you , they + were

+ What is the difference ?

- Notice the changes - Ask Ss to underline: was, were in the dialogue.

- Ask Ss to make questions. * Ordinary verbs you/ like/ Nha Trang?

Ss: Do you like Nha Trang?

T: Do you like Nha Trang?

Eg: Ss: Yes / No + Do you like Nha Trang? + Can you tell me the past simple tense of Did you like Nha Trang? “do”?

- Yes, I did / No, I didn’t - Ask Ss to make questions using “did” Ss: Did you like Nha Trang?

T : Did you like Nha Trang?

Ss: Yes, I did / No, I didn’t - Ask Ss to change this question into the + What do you think of Nha Trang? past simple tense What did you think of Nha Trang? + What do you think of Nha Trang?

Ss: What did you think of Nha Trang?  Regular verbs: Ved : played , - Ask Ss to look at the book page 177 to see returned some irregular verbs  Irregular verbs: did ( the second - Ask Ss to underline the verbs in the past colunm ) P177 tense in the dialogue .

Guide the sts read the past verb: saw go went see take took buy bought think do did thought have had give gave Pronunciation:* Cách phát âm đuôi “ed”: + với các động từ có tận cùng là “t” và “d”, khi thêm “ed” ta đọc là /id/ Eg: decided, painted…….. * Set the scene : Liz is talking to Ba about +Với các động từ có tận cùng là: s,x, z, her recent vacation in Nha Trang ch, sh ,th,p,k,f khi thêm “ed” đều đọc là - Let Ss read first /t/ Eg: talked, thanked....... + Với các trường hợp còn lại, khi thêm “ed” ta đọc là /d/ Eg: played, moved.......

3- Practice :( Practice the past simple tense) 2

-TM: discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Be responsible for yourself and everyone. Love country + What are there in Nha Trang ?

-(beach , Tri nguyen Aquarium , Cham Temples ) - Call on some Ss to read in pairs - Ask Ss to work in pairs to number these sentences.

- Check their order 4- Futher practice: - Ask Ss to work in pairs to fill in the gaps 1- parents 2- visited / saw 3- souvenirs 4- America 5- friendly 6- delicious 7- expensive - Check and correct

* Fill in the gaps Liz went to Nha Trang with her (1)________. They (2)_________ Tri Nguyen Aquarium and Cham Temples .

They bought a lot of (3)_______ and gifts for her friends in (4)__________. The people in Nha Trang were very (5 )________ . The food was (6)__________. But most of things were quite (7)__________.

5.- Production : - Ask Ss to learn and retell the dialogue - Retell Liz’s trip in Nha Trang - Learn all the verbs both in regular and irregular

Week: 20 Period: 56

c, Practice the dialogue * Order the sentences 1- Liz went to Nha Trang 2- Liz visited Tri Nguyen Aquarium .

3- Liz bought souvenirs 4- Liz returned to Hanoi .

5- Liz talked to Ba about her vacation .

Fill the blanks with one suitable word for each

Homework : - Retell Liz’s trip in Nha Trang - Learn all the verbs both in regular and irregular

UNIT 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY Lesson 2 : A 2

Preparation date: 4/1/2019 Teaching date : 11/1/2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , students will be able to talk about Liz’s trip to Tri Nguyen Aquarium in Nha Trang with her parents.

-Practice asking and answering about the events in the past and practice listening skill about their trip and choose the correct sentences.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3

3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

Love country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: T & Ss’ activities 1- Warm-up : - Ask Ss to name some of them even in Vietnamese

Contents * Brain-storming : shark

- Add more if necessary. * Read : 2, Pre- reading : -TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and Love country * Present some new words: picture picture picture picture explanation picture synonym picture - Check : matching with picture -*introduce the past simple with wh question: Give the example and letthe sts remark.

turtle

sea animal

dolphin crab

A2-read: a, New words: shark (n ) :cá mập dolphin (n ) :cá heo turtle (n ) : con rùa biển crab ( n ) :con cua entrance (n ): lối vào >< exit (n) :lối ra cap (n ) : mũ lưỡi trai type ( n ) = kind = sort : loại ,chủng loại poster (n): áp phích b.Structure : What did the Robinson see there ?

They saw sharks…

4

3, While- reading : -TM: Discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation -Q: Be responsible for yourself and everyone. Love country - Liz went to Tri Nguyen Aquarium Think about what they saw , what they bought , and what they eat for lunch - Show out the questions first .

- Ss read through all questions - Ask Ss to read the text in silence then answer the questions - Call on some Ss to answer

b, Answer the questions a- Her parents b- Sharks , dolphin , turtles and many different types of fish c- A cap for Liz and a poster d- Yes , she did . Liz wore it all day e- Yes , they do . They ate fish and crabs f- Because she remembered the beautiful fish in the aquarium .

4, Post- reading : c, Retell the text using pictures in the book - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and retell a- The Robinson went to Tri Nguyen Aquarium the story. b- They saw ... c- There was a souvenir shop ....Mr Robinson bought Liz ....... d- They went to a food stall for lunch . Mr and Mrs Robinson ate .... Liz ....

- Write about their trip to Nha Trang 5.Production : d,Home work - Ask Ss to write full sentences -Do the home work on work book -Retell about the Robinson’s trip.

- Write about their trip to Nha Trang -Ask Ss to look at the pictures and identify the place or activity of each one.

-Have them retell the story about Liz’s trip (refer to the reading passage and use the verbs in the past simple tense) -Call on some Ss to tell the story before the class.

Week: 20 Period:57

UNIT 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY Lesson 3 : A 3,4 5

Preparation date:5/1/2019 Teaching date : 12/1/2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , students will be able to read Ba’s diary and correct the false sentences .

Practice the past simple tense and compare with the future and present tense.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

Love country, willing to participate in social activities II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s and students’ activities Contents 1- Warm-up : - Ask some questions about Liz. + What do you know about Liz ? + Where is she from ? + What are her parents’ names ? + What does her father do ?.....

2- Pre- reading : -TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident * Present some new words: - Use some techniques to teach vocab explanation synonym example translation explanation synonym translation

*Questions and answer : - Liz is Ba’s friend - She is from America - Their names are Mr and Mrs Robinson .

- He’s a teacher .

A4 : Read Ba’s diary : a, New words: - diary (n ) :nhật kỳ - arrive _ arrived = come to - rent _ rented - keep _ kept in touch with sb - teach _ taught - improve _ improved = get better - bring _ brought 6

- Check : What and Where - Have Ss read the sentences and guess whether the sentences are true or false.

3- While-reading : -TM: Discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Love country - Have Ss read the text in silence.

- Ask Ss to work in group of four to correct the false ones.

- Call on some Ss to go to the board and correct each sentence .

4- Post- reading : - Ask Ss to retell all they know about Liz based on the corrected sentences - Have Ss listen to the poem first.

- Guide Ss to read: Jazz chants.

- Check and correct (groups ) * Listen Pre- listening : - Ask Ss to look through all the sentences carefully - Ask Ss to guess first While-listening : - Play the tape the first time - Have Ss listen to the tape.

- Ss listen and check the right one - Ask Ss to share with their partner - Ss speak out the sentences : b,d,e,h,j Post- listening : - Retell about the Robinson’s trip sentence by sentence

5.Production: -T asks some questions and Ss answers.

-Copy the correct sentences.

- on the other side

b, Read Ba's diary then do the correction a- a long way _ next door to b- USA _ Viet Nam c- Liz _ Ba d- Vietnam _ New York e- Ho Chi Minh city _ other side of Hanoi f- happy _ unhappy g- never _ next week c, Retell about Liz and her family

A3 : Listen then write the letter you hear :

* Answer keys: b,d,e,h,j * Retell about the Robinson’s trip.

Begin with : - The Robinson returned to Hanoi by bus ....

Homework : -Learn by heart the new words and verbs they have learnt.

7

-Prepare B 1, 2(Explain voc) - Ask Ss to write it up

- Write a short paragraph to retell about Liz and her family .

-------------------------------o0o-----------------------------Kiểm tra ngày 7 tháng 01 năm 2019 ……………………………………………………. …………………………………………………… …………………………………………………….. …………………………………………………….

8

Week: 21 Period: 58

UNIT 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY Lesson 4 : B 1, 2

Preparation date: 9/1/2019 Teaching date : 16/1/2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , students will be able to describe the chracteristics of people( their neighbor) by practising the dialogue between Lan and Hoa and learning how to make yes-no questions of the simple past tense 2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

Love country, willing to participate in social activities II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: T& Ss’ activities Contents 1- Warm-up : * Brain-storming : - Ask Ss to write as many words as possible . hairdresser doctor nurse

occupations teacher dressmaker + What does a hairdresser do ? + What does a dressmaker do ?

Pelmanism arrive be go see teach went saw arrived taught was / were

- He / she cuts hair - He / she makes dress and clothes *Pelmanism arrive 9

be

go

see

teach

went saw arrived taught was / were 2- Presentation: -TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone. a, Act 1 ( Pre-teach new vocab) - Use some techniques to teach vocab explanation picture explanation translation

- Check vocab ROR b, Act 2 ( Present the past simple tense: The negative and interrogative form) - Set the scene : Picture * Pre-teach grammar structure of the simple past tense especially in negative and interrogative sentences - Give example clearly - Ask Ss to give more examples and the form - Ask Ss to find out the sentences in negative and introgative in the dialogue

B1 : Listen then practice : a, New words: - neighbor (n ) :người láng riềng - hairdresser (n ) :thợ cắt /uốn tóc nữ picture + meaning - dressmaker (n ):thợ may quần áo phụ nữ person who makes clothes - clever (a):khéo tay ,tài giỏi

b, Grammar: The past simple tense * The simple past tense in negative and introgative sentences : Ex : I don’t play sports every day I didn’t play sports yesterday (- ) Sb did not do sth didn’t Ex : Do you go to the cinema every day?

Did you go to the cinema yesterday ?

No , I didn’t . ( ? ) Did sb do sth ?

Yes , sb did / No , sb didn’t

3- Practice:(Practice reading and answer the questions) -TM: technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Be responsible for yourself and everyone.

- Play the tape - Ss listen to the tape - Ask Ss to practice in pair to read the 10

dialogue - Ask Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions - Check and correct Vuestions 4.Futher practice - Adk Ss to work in pairs to ask and answer - Ss practice asking and answering the questions. Notice the answer with “yes , no”

c, Answer the questions a- She’s a hairdresser b- She’s a dressmaker

B2 : Answer : Ex : S1: Did Hoa buy the dress ?

S2: No , she didn’t buy it . * Freely to ask what they did yesterday - Ex : Did you stay at home yesterday morning ?

Yes , I did / No , I didn’t

5- Production : - Ask and answer using the simple past tense - Call on some pairs to ask and answer - Ask about themselves - Ask Ss to write it up

Week: 21 Period: 59

Homework: - Write all the things you did yesterday begin with : Yesterday , I got up at ....

- Do exercises in the workbook ( part B. P55 ) Ex1: Use the past form of the verbs in the box to complete the sentences.

UNIT 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY Preparation date:11/1/2019 Lesson 5 : B 3 , 4 Teaching date : 18/1/2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , students will be able to: -Read the text about Hoa’s hobby and answer the questions.

-use the simple past tense to talk about past activities .

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 11

4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone. willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: T& Ss’ activities 1- Warm-up : - Ask s to speak in order to remember them - Call on some students to write on the board.

2- Pre- reading : -TM: Play game -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident * Pre-teach new vocab - Use some techniques to teach vocab Synonym Picture mime picture example meaning translation translation - Check : Rub out and Remember

Contents * Change these verbs in the past tense - go went - do did - make made - cut cut - buy bought - use used - decide decided

B 3 : Read then answer : a, New words: - hobby ( n)sở thích,thích thú = interest -cushion (n) :tấm đệm, - sew ( v ) :khâu, may vá - sewing machine ( n ) : máy may - decide to do sth ( v ) :quyết định - try sth on ( v ) thử,mặc thử - fit ( v ) : vừa - Useful(a): có ích,bổ ích

- Get Ss to read all the questions quickly - Ss look through all the questions first - Set the scene : 12

3- While-reading(Practice reading and answer the question) -TM: Play game, practising, discussion group -C: Co-operation -Q: Self-made and confident - Ask Ss to read the text individually - Ss read the text then answer the questions

b, Answer the questions a- A sewing machine b- A cushion first c- Blue and white d- A skirt - Ask them to find out the answer for e- Green with little flowers on it each then share with a partner f- Pretty g- It was too big and it didn’t fit h- Her neighbor did - Call on some pairs to ask and answer i- Very well

4- Post-reading : - Ask Ss to do individually first then share with their partner.

- Read the text again notice the pronunciation of the regular verbs ( Ved ) - Ask about themselves

B 4 : Write . Put these verbs into the simple past tense : watched bought cut used decided / was made / was / wasn’t helped / fitted

5.Production: - Ask them to use the correct past form of the verb -Copy B 4 and the answers Prepare “Language Focus 3” (Explain voc, copy the exercises - Ask Ss to write it up and learn by heart

Homework : - Learn some regular and irregular verbs in the simple past tense - Do exercises in the workbook ( part B. P56 ) Ex2: Complete the sentences with the verbs in the negative Ex3: Write the questions with Wh- words.

Ex4: Read then answer the questions

- Call on some Ss to write on the poster

13

Week: 21 LANGUAGE FOCUS 3 Preparation date:12/1/2019 Period: 60 Teaching date : 19/1/2019 I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , students will be able to consolidate from Unit 7 to unit 9 follow some grammar points : prices , distance , places , and the simple past tense.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone. cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: T& Ss’ activities 1- Warm-up : - Devide the class into two groups - Each student chooses the verb then change it into the past form - Make sure of the point they gain 2.Presentation Act1.Review some new structures : How much . -TM: technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident Have the sts repeat how to ask and answer about price: -Have the sts read again,and give the example.

Act2.Review some prepositions of positionuj 14

Contents * Nought and crosses : buy Take Talk

help send play

remember think work

A.Theory 1.Ask and answer about the price: How much is /are + N? It is /they are …….

Have the repeat some preposition and the meaning.

Act3.Review some new structures about the distance : Howfar…

-Have the sts repeat how to ask about the distance.

2.Preposition of place. beside,next to ,oppossite,between,….

3.Ask and answer about the distance. +How far is it from …..to …?

Act4.Review the simple past.

It is (about)…..+ K/c ..

-Let the sts repeat the form and use of the 4.Simple past. simple past.

S + Ved …..

Act5Review the comparion with noun.

-Have the sts repeat the way to use the simple eg:She watched TV yesterday.

5.Comparion past More >< less / fewer +much/many-> more +little-> less +few->fewer 3- Practice : B.Practice.

-TM: Play game, practising -C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and be responsible for yourself and everyone. a, Act 1 ( Practice the question and answer 1- How much is it ? about the price) A : How much is the green dress ?

- Ask Ss to look at the item column and the B : It’s 30,000 dong price A : What about the violet one ?

- Use “ how much” to ask about price B : It’s 35 , 000 dong - Give example clearly - Ss replace words to make similar dialogues 2- Prepositions of position : b, Act 2 ( Practice the prepositions of a, Pepositions of position position) - next to = beside - Ask Ss to retell prepositions of position - to the left >< to the right - between / opposite ...

- Ask Ss to repeat some places * Practice speaking about places - Ask Ss to look at the map and ask and - Shoe store , hairdressser’s , restaurant , answer about the position of some places library , minimart , park ...

- Guide Ss to look at the street map to ask Eg: and answer.

S1: Where is the clothing store ?

- Ss play role to practice speaking S2: It is on Hai Ba Trung Street . It is near the shoe store to the right b- Ask and answer about distance c, Act 3 ( Practice the question and answer Eg : How far is it from Co Phuc town to about distance) 15

Yen Bai city?

- It’s about ten kilometers.

- Ask Ss to look at the table and make questions and answer * How far is it from A to B ?

- It is about ... ( 800 meters ) d, Act 4 (Practice the past simple tense) 3- The simple past tense : - Ask Ss to repeat the verbs in past tense then a, Write the past form of the verbs in write down. the table Past form Verb - Have Ss complete the sentences.

Buy Bought - Check and correct.

Helped → 4 Remembered Help → Took Remember → Sent Take Thought → Talked Send → Think → Talk → b, Complete the sentences - I played ...

- Yesterday , I talked ...

- Last December , Mom bought ...

- Dad worked ...

- I sent a letter ...

4.Futher practice 4- The simple tenses : e, Act 5 ( Practice the simple tenses) Tomorrow Yesterday Today - Ask Ss to repeat simple tenses they have Sunday Monday Tuesday learnt Past Present Future + How many simple tenses do you learn ?

S + will +V S+ Ved / S+Vs, - Repeat the formation and the use of the did es three ones - Ss look at Nga’s diary then complete the dialogues 5- Comparison : f, Act 6 ( Practice more, less, fewer) More >< less / fewer - Repeat the nouns . Ask Ss to put them in the Countable nouns Uncountable right column nouns - Poster of the things in the book beef tomatoes - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and make butter onions comparison. Compare now with before milk bananas - Ss make as many sentences as possible orange juice cabbages - Give example

16

chicken

eggs

Ex : Before , There were two eggs .

Now , There are more eggs - Before , There was one liter of milk Now , There is less milk .

- Do all of those ones again in wrtiting 6 Homework: - Copy the exercises.

- Prepare Unit 10 : A 1 (Explain voc)

5.Production: - Have Ss do some more exercises.

- Copy the exercises.

- Prepare Unit 10 : A 1 (Explain voc)

- Ask Ss to write it up -------------------------------o0o-----------------------------Kiểm tra ngày 14 tháng 1 năm 2019 ……………………………………………………. …………………………………………………… …………………………………………………….. …………………………………………………….

17

Week: 22 Period: 61

UNIT 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE Lesson 1 : A 1,4

Preparation date: 16/1/2019 Teaching date : 23/1/2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , students will be able to know somethings about how to keep fit through the letter which Hoa’s Mom wrote to her . + Read and answer the questions a-e. +Remember the actions which happen every day and review the simple present. + Write the letter to Hoa’s mother with suitable words.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone. willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES:

18

Teacher’s and students’ activities 1- Warm-up : + What should you do to keep fit or stay healthy ? +Have the sts write the activities as many as they can.

- Ask Ss to work in groups 2- Pre- reading: * Present the new words: -TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident T uses some techniques to present the new words. explanation explanation example mime synonym translation // //

Contents What we should do to keep fit : 1- don’t stay up late 2- get up early 3- go to bed on time 4- do morning exercise 5- eat vegetables

A 1 : Read then answer the questions : a, New words - harvest time (n ) :mùa gặt ,vụ mùa - helpful ( a ) :giúp ích - hope (v ) : hy vọng - iron (v ) :là,ủi - hear (v ) = listen to (v): nghe - stay up late (v) : thức khuya - nearly (adv):gần - probably (adv): có lẽ

- Check : “What and where” * Introduce the situation of the text .

- Set the scene : This is a letter which Hoa’s mother wrote to her . Do you think what she tell her in the letter ?

- Get Ss’ predictions 3- While- reading :(Practice reading to get information ) -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and Be responsible for yourself and everyone. b, Answer the questions a- Because it is almost harvest time - Ask Ss to read all the questions - Ss look through all the questions to b- Hoa’s grandfather 19

aim for the reading - Ask Ss listen to the tape first - Ask Ss to read in silence to get information for those questions.

Underline the information which they can base on to answer the questions.

- Call on some pairs to ask and answer.

- Ask some Ss to write them on board - Check and correct.

4- Post- reading:Check the sts’ understanding after reading).

c- Soon , after the harvest d- She gets up early and does morning exercise e- She wants her to do her own washing and ironing . But she doesn’t want her to eat too much candy and stay up late .

-Ask Ss to retell the main contents of the letter .

A4.Write .Complete Hoa’s reply to her mother .( For good students Ask some questions: + Do you often write letters? What do you often write to your mother ? + This is Hoa’s letter ( reply ) to her mom . What do you think she wrote to her about ?

- Let them talk as many as possible - Ask Ss to read the letter from Hoa to her Mom - Ask Ss to fill the blanks with suitable verbs in all tenses . Then compare with their partners.

- Ss do the exercise in the students’ book - Call on some Ss to read the letter aloud 4.Production: -T gives some sentences on another board and Ss answer “True” or “false” -Copy the answers.

-Learn voc.

- Ask Ss to write a similar letter to tell her / his father / mother about every day activities.

c, Retell the letter A 4 : Write . Complete Hoa’s reply to her mother with suitable verbs . * Answers: was , having , show , take , get , go , wash , iron , eating , told , see , go

*Homework : -Write a similar letter- Write what you do everyday and what time you do those activities.

- Do exercises in the workbook (p61) Ex1: Write the sentences. What did Nam do yesterday?

Ex2: Write the sentences. What did you do yesterday?

20

Week: 22 Period: 62

UNIT 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE Lesson 2 : A 2,3

Preparation date:18/1/2019 Teaching date : 26/1/2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , students will be able to listen for details and reorder the pictures following the story and talk about routine day using the simple present tense .

- read Nam’s diary and ask and answer about Nam’s activities.

- talk about their everyday activities.

- talk about Hoa’s every day activities.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s and students’ activities 1- Warm-up : Give the sts some pictures in page 100 .

-Introduce those are hoa’s activities.

-Let the sts rewrite all the activities they can remember.

- Ask Ss to work in groups 2. Pre-listening Act1. Present the new vocabulary.

-TM: Play game, practising

Contents * Kim’s game : - get up - iron the clothes - go to school - comb hair …………

21

-C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made to put on ( mine ) to put in ( // ) to polish ( picture ) to change (translation) pants (n) (picture ) Act2 .Review the form of some verbs in the past tense .

-Have the sts wtite the past simple tense of the verbs :

Act 3 - Introduce the situation of the text - Give the sts 8 pictures in A2-page 100 and point to the picture then asks: +“ What does she do ?” in order to review some routin actions.

- Introduce the sts they are Hoa’s activities.

-Let the sts guess the order of the pictures.

3-While- listening(Practice listening to get information.

--TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Be responsible for yourself and everyone.

Let the sts listen and check their prediction.

- Ask Ss to listen carefully then put them in order - Check and correct.

4- Post- listening:Practice retelling the main content of the text.

- Look at the pictures then retell the main content of the text A3 : Read Nam’s diary Pre-reading : Act1.Review the questions and answers about every day activities.)

A2 : Listen then put the picture in the right order.

1.Newwords: to put on (v) mặc ,đội. to put in (v) to polish (v) đánh giày,lau giày to change (v) Thay đổi pants (n) Quần dài 2.Past simple of some verbs: Put –put Eat – ate Have – had Do- did Drink- drank Change- changed Iron-ironed * Prediction Eg: - get up - polish her shoes - comb hair

a, Listen to the tape then order the pictures: a , e, f , d , g , c , h , b

b, Look at the picture then retell the action that Hoa did yesterday: - Yesterday Hoa got up , she ....

22

-Have the sts repeat how they can ask and answer about every day activities.

Act 2.Introduce the situation of the text.

Set the sence: you are going to read Nam’s diary to know what he does everyday.

Act3.Prediction.

-Have the sts guess what Nam does every day and the time he does these activities.

-Have the sts work in group.

A3 : Read Nam’s diary : a.Review the structure: What do you do/does Nam do everyday?

I do/ he does…….

What time do you /does he ………

I / he ……. b.Prediction: Activities Time Get up 5.00 …. … …. … c. Practice.

Eg: S1: What time does he get up ?

S2: He gets up at 6.30 S1: What does Nam do at 6.30?

S2: He does morning exercises.

While –reading : Act1.Practice asking and answering about Nam. -Have the sts read and check their prediction.

- Have the sts work in pairs and ask & answer about Nam .

- Give them example.

- Call some pair to check then correct.

Act2.Retelling about Nam .

-Have the sts retell about Nam .

-Call themto check .

Post- reading . d.Ask and answer about their partners.

(Futher practice about their partner’ Eg: S1: What do you do every day? activities.)

S2: Every day I get up.

- Have Ss complete a diary entry like S1: What time do you get up?

Nam’s.

S2: Every day I get up at 6.00 - Ask Ss to work in pairs to ask and .................... answer about his / her partner’s routine.

- Ss practice asking and answering some questions to show their routine activities - Have the sts tell about their routine activities.

5.Production Homework: - Ask Ss to: 23

- Do execies in tthe workbbok (p61,62) Ex1: Write the sentences. What did Nam do yesterday?

Ex2: Write the sentences. What did you do yesterday?

Ex3: Compelte the sentensec with the possitive and negative forms of the verbs.

Ex4: Write the questions with : Did....

- Do exercises in the workbook (p61,62) Ex1: Write the sentences. What did Nam do yesterday?

Ex2: Write the sentences. What did you do yesterday?

Ex3: Compelte the sentensec with the possitive and negative forms of the verbs.

Ex4: Write the questions with : Did....

24

Week: 22 Period: 63

UNIT 10: HEALTH AND HYGIENE Lesson 3: B 1

Preparation date: 19/1/2019 Teaching date : 26/ 1 /2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, students will be able to : + Know some words about toothache , their feeling when they had a toothache + know how to take care of their teeth. +review the past simple .

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s & Ss’ activities 1.Warm-up : Introduce the topic of the lesson by asking and answering the questions:

Contents + Have you ever had a toothache? + What did you do at that time? + Are you afraid of seeing a dentist?

2- Presentation: * Act 1.Present new words: -TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident -Use some techniques to teach vocab: examples , synonym ,pictures ,translation B1 : Listen then practice with a partner: a, New words 25

-a toothache (n):sự đau răng (picture )-> have a toothache -a dentist (n) : nha sĩ (picture ) -a drill (n) ;máy khoan (picture ) -a cavity(n) ;lỗ răng sâu (picture ) -uniform(n) (picture ) -sound (n) :âm thanh ( translation) - appointment ( n ):sự hen,cuộc hẹn , make / have an appoitment (translation ) -an advice (n)(tran……)

- scared ( a ) :sợ hãi = afraid (synonym) - to hate (v ):ghét = dislike // - to hurt ( v ) : làm đau mime - to fix ( v ) (translation) - to fill (v) :lấp chỗ trống (translation) - Check : Matching Act2. Introduce the situation of the text.

- Show the picture of the dialogues and ask some questions. + Who is this? + What is the matter with him? .....

Act3.Review the past simple using the situation in the dialogue: - Hoa had a toothache .What did the dentist do with a cavity in her tooth?

- Ask Ss to listen to the dialogue then answer the questions.

- Ask Ss to read the questions in the textbook carefully. Make sure they understand all.

3- Practice (Practice reading to get information.

-TM: Practising, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and be responsible for yourself and everyone.

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue in pairs then answer the questions - Call on some pairs to ask and answer - Check and correct. ( closed pairs )

4.Futher practice 26

b .Structures: Last week, the dentist filled a cavity in my tooth.

b, Answer the questions a- Minh has a toothache b- No. The loudness of the drill scares him / He is scared of the drill c- Because she had a toothache d- She filled the cavity in her tooth

(Practice talking about you.) * About you e- What did you do the last time you had a - Ask Ss to discuss to answer the two last bad toothache? questions f- Are you scared of seeing the dentist?

5.Production * Homework - Ask Ss to : -Do the exercises in the workbook (P 64, 65) -Do the exercises in the workbook (P 64, Ex1: Complete the sentences with the simple 65) present or simple past tense of the verbs Ex1: Complete the sentences with the Ex2: Write the questions with Wh-words and simple present or simple past tense of the the answers. verbs Ex2: Write the questions with Wh-words and the answers.

-------------------------------o0o-----------------------------Kiểm tra ngày 21 tháng 1 năm 2019 ……………………………………………………. …………………………………………………… …………………………………………………

27

Week: 23 Period: 64

UNIT 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE Lesson 4 : B 2 ,3

Preparation date: 23/1/2019 Teaching date : 30/1/2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , students will be able to: + review the words about toothache. +Read and complete about Minh and how he is at the dentist’s. + know how to take care of their teeth well .

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Love family and country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: T’s & Ss’ activities 1- Warm-up : - Ask Ss some questions: + How do you do to take good care of your teeth ? + Which food or drink do you eat or drink ?

Contents * Chatting: Talk about the things that you do to take care of your teeth - I often wash my teeth after meal - I go to the dentist every six months to check - I eat and drink things that good for teeth such as : fruit , milk ...

2.Pre reading -TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language 28

-Q: Self-made and confident * Present the new vocabulary: T uses :synonym mime synonym meaning meaning

B3 : Listen and read : 1.New words: - check one’s teeth (v) = examine - smile (v) : mỉm cười - serious (a) nghiêm trọng = bad - explain sth to sb (v) :giải thích……..

- leave (v ) : rời khỏi

- Check vocab by ROR 3.While reading -TM: discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Be responsible for yourself and everyone.

- Have Ss read the summary in silence.

- Ask Ss to read the text again then complete the story .

- Use poster of questions to check their understanding.

- Ss answer these comprehension questions.

4.Post reading.

Complete the story nervous... smiles... cavity ... brush...pleased - Ss practice speaking in pairs to ask and answer the question to make similar dialogues - Call on some pairs to ask and answer *B2 : Listen then answer the questions :

Pre-listening :(Introduce the situation of the listening text)

2.Complete the story nervous... smiles... cavity ... brush...pleased

3.Answer the questions : a- What’s the matter with Minh ?

He has a toothache . b- How does he feel ?

He feels nervous. c- What is the doctor doing ?

She is checking his teeth and filling the cavity in his tooth. d- Why does that happen to him ?

Because he doesn’t brush his teeth regularly B2 : Listen then answer the questions : a, Prediction 29

- Set the scene first: We are going to hear about Dr Lai. Then answer some questions about her.

- Ask Ss to read the questions first - Ask Ss to guess the answers about Dr Lai’s job / clothes ...

- Ss dicuss in pair to guess the answers - Get Ss’ predictions.

While- listening (Practice listening to get information) - Play the tape - Ss listen to the tape - Have Ss listen and check their predictions.

- Ask Ss to share with their partner - Call on some Ss to answer - Have Ss listen again and check their listening.

Post- listening: -Have the sts ask and answer the questions again. *Practice retelling about their recent toothache .( for the strong sts) - Have the sts talk about their recent toothache .( for the strong sts) 5.Production: - Ask Ss to: - Do the exercises in the workbook (P 64, 65) Ex2: Write the questions with Wh- words and the answers.

Ex3: Match the lines in A and the lines in B. Then write full sentences by using because.

- Write what Minh should do to take care of his teeth

Week: 23 Period: 65

b, Check prediction a- She is a dentist b- She wears a uniform to work c- Most children feel scared when they come to see Dr Lai d- She explains what will happen. She gives them advice . She tells them how to look after their teeth and she reminds them to clean their teeth regularly and eat sensibly c, Talk about your recent toothache: When did you have a toothache?

Why did you have a toothache?

Where did you fill your cavity?

What did you do to take care of your teeth?

*Homework - Do the exercises in the workbook (P 64, 65) Ex2: Write the questions with Wh- words and the answers.

Ex3: Match the lines in A and the lines in B. Then write full sentences by using because.

- Write what Minh should do to take care of his teeth

UNIT 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE Lesson 5 : B 4 + TEST 15’ NUMBER 3

30

Preparation date:25/1/2019 Teaching date : 1/2/2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , students will be able to: +know how to make questions and answer using “ Why / because”.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone. cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: 1. TEST 15’ T’s & Ss’ activities Contents 2.Presentation -TM: Play game -C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident - Presentation text (use B1,3 to set the sentences) II.Answer the questions : (Practice asking and answering about Minh using Why –because ) - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and the word given . Make questions and answer using the words given in b,c ,d - Ss practice speaking in pairs to ask and answer the question to make similar dialogues

a- What’s the matter with Minh ?

He has a toothache . b- How does he feel ?

He feels nervous. c- What is the doctor doing ?

- Call on some pairs to ask and answer - Elicit the model sentences from Ss * Model sentences Why does Minh’s tooth hurt?

She is checking his teeth and filling the cavity in his tooth.

31

Because he has a cavity 3.Practice -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present, play game.

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Love family, friends “Word cue Drill” - Prepare 4 word cue cards - Run trough the cues.

- Give the model with one word cue card Minh’s tooth / hurt / Have / cavity

d- Why does that happen to him ?

Because he doesn’t brush his teeth regularly

III: Ask and answer : Why ? - Because a - Minh’s tooth hurt .

Cavity / not serious / Small

- Why ?

He / nervous / see dentist

- Because he has a cavity

He / happy/ teeth/ OK

b- Minh feels / is / looks nervous - Why ?

- Because he has to see a dentist c- The cavity isn’t serious - Why ?

- Because it is small d- Minh feels / looks happy - Why ?

“T/F statement repetition drill” - Teacher reads some statements and ask Ss to listen if the sentence is true Ss repeat and if the sentence is wrong Ss keep silent. a. Minh goes to the dentist because he has a toothache b. He isn’t scared because he he loves the

- Beause his teeth are ok IV.“T/F statement repetition drill” a.T b.F c.T d.F 32

sound of drill c. The cavity is not serious because it’s small d.Minh’s tooth is hurt because he always brushes his teeth 4.Futher practice “Noughts and crosses” - Ask Ss to play the game in 2 teams Go / dentist Have/ Not go/ /toothache toothache/ school/ eat / a lot toothache of sweet Teeth / Nervous? Happy? better?/ See / Teeth tooth / shop dentist fine hurting Have / Not Tooth toothache scared? hurt?

Forget / Dentist / cavity brush teeth kind 5.Production - Do exercie B4 in the workbook - Learn by heart vocab.

- Prepare next lesson. Unit 11. Lesson 1.

A1.

V.“Noughts and crosses” a.Minh go to the dentistbecause he has a toothache b. He has a toothache because he eats a lot of sweet c……. d…… e……

*Homework - Do the exercises in the workbook (P 64, 65) Ex2: Write the questions with Wh- words and the answers, Ex3: Match the lines in A and the lines in B. Then write full sentences by using because.

- Write what Minh should do to take care of his teeth

TEST 15’ The Vietnamese students take part in different …(1) ........ Some students play sports.

They often play soccer, table (2)......... or badminton. Sometimes they go(3).......... in the swimming pools. Some students like music, drama and movies. They often practice playing musical (4)......... in the school music room. They (5)........in the school theater group and usually rehearse plays. Some are members (6)........ the stamp collectors’ club. They often get.(7)........ and talk about their (8) ....... . A few students stay at home 33

and play video games or computer school (10)..........

1. A. active B. actions 2. A. ping pong B. volleyball 3. A. running B. walking 4. A. instruments B. things 5. A. go B. join 6. A. with B. of 7. A. in B. each other 8. A. work B. study 9. A. tools B. games 10. A. months B. year

(9)....... Most of them enjoy their activities after C. action C. basketball C. swimming C. tools C. take C. for C. another C. stamps C. equipment C. days

D. activities D. tennis D. fishing D. equipments D. get D. in D. together D. jobs D. science D. hours

----------THE END-------KEY: Sentence 1 2 3 4 5

Key D D C A B

Sentence 6 7 8 9 10

34

Key B D C B D

Week: 24 Period:66

UNIT 11 : KEEP FIT AND STAY HEALTHY Lesson 1 : A 1,2

Preparation date: 6/2/2019 Teaching date : 13/2/2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , students will be able to know what is check when they have a medical check-up: temperature, heigh and weight and listen carefully to fill the dialogue + they can order other to do smt using Would you + V-inf …

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

Love family, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: T & Ss’ activities Contents I- Warm-up : * Chatting : - Ask Ss some questions: - Yes + Do you ever have your health checked at - Weight / height / temperature ... school ?

- Listen to the heart / lung + What do the doctors or nurses - Look at eyes / teeth ... check ?

35

II- Presentation: -TM: Play game, technical present….

-C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made Act1. Present some new vocabulary - Use some techniques to teach vocab picture /situation real object example example mime picture // example

A1 : Listen then practice : a, New words: - medical check-up (n) :sự kiểm tra sức khỏe - medical report / record (n):phiếu sức khỏe - temperature (n):nhiệt độ : eg: 37 0c - nomal (a) :bình thường - measure (v) : đo - scale (n ) :cái cân - weigh (v ) :cân, cân nặng - weight (n ): trọng lượng

- Check vocab by meaning Act2.Introduce the situation of the litening text - Set the scene : The students of Quang Trung school are having a medical check-up ...( students’ book - Ss listen to the teacher’s explanation - Have Ss read all the questions.

- Ask Ss to guess the order - Ss guess the order first - Get their guesing

III- Practice(Practice listening to get information.)

-TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Be responsible for yourself and everyone.

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue in pairs.

- Ask Ss to read the text individually and b, Open prediction: number the sentences to show what the Guess doctor does from beginning to the end .Then 1 work with a partner to check their 2 predictions.

36

Listen f d

- Check and correct.

- Ask Ss to write down some sentences that the doctot use to check-up their health + Have temperature + Have their height + Have their weight

3 4 5 6 7

c g e a h

* Notice : - Would you open your mouth ?

- That’s 37 0c - I need to know your height - Can I measure you .

- I need to weigh you . c, Retell the dialogue Hoa filled in the medical report . The nurse call Hoa’s name .... d, Make similar dialogues 4.Futher practice - Let students look at the picture and ask some questions: • “How many people are there in the picture?”

• “Who are they?”

• “Where are they?”

• …………………………………… ……………………

- T introduces the situation - Have them read the dialogue the first time and make guesses on the missing words.

- Play the tape and Ss listen to.

- Let them listen to again and do the exercise.

- Have Ss compare their answers with their partners.

- Ask them to give the answers.

- Ss listen to again and provide the correct answers.

5- Production(Practice retelling the dialogue ) - Ask Ss to retell the dialogue - Ask Ss to work in pairs to make similar dialogues.

37

A2- Listen. Then write the missing words.

Doctor: I want to ask you a few questions before I start, Hoa. How old are you?

Hoa: Fourteen Doctor: And your height is one meter 50 centimeters?

Hoa: no, I think I’m shorter. The nurse measured me.

Doctor: Oh. How tall are you?

Hoa: One meter 45 centimeters.

Doctor: I will ask the nurse to check your height again. How heavy are you?

Hoa: I think I’m 42 kilograms.

Doctor: No. It says on your form that you’re 40 kilograms.

*- Homework - Review the simple past tense by rewrite the sentences in order ,

- Help Ss if nesecessary - Ask Ss to : - Review the simple past tense by rewrite the sentences in order , underlined the verb form

Week: 24 Period: 67

underlined the verb form .

UNIT 11: KEEP FIT AND STAY HEALTHY Lesson 2 : A 3

Preparation date: 8/2/2019 Teaching date : 15/2/2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , students will be able ask and answer about personal information to fill in the medical report .

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone. live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: T & Ss’ activities I- Warm-up : - Show out the report: Ask Ss to make questions school class name address age weight / height

Contents * Make questions :Think about the question that they use to ask for the information .

- Which school do you go to ?

- Which class do you go to ?

- What is your name / full name ?

- Where do you live ?

38

- How old are you ?

- What is your weight / height ?

2.Presentation -TM: discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Be responsible for yourself and everyone.Love family, friends * A3 P.108 – 109 - Have Ss work in closed pairs: one is A , the other is B - Ask Ss to use these questions to ask their friends 3.Practice (Practice making similar dialogue) -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

3. Ask and answer with a partner -Q: Be responsible for yourself and everyone.

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to make similar dialogues.

MEDICAL RECORD - Ask Ss to use the questions in the warmer to ask and answer then fill the form - Use the questions for the third person ( Kien ) 1- Which school does he go to ?

2- Which class is he in ?

3- What is his fore name ?

4- What is his surname ?

5- Where does he live ?

6- What is his age ?/ How old is he ?

7- What is his weight ?/ How much does he weigh ?

8- How tall is he ?/ What is his height ?

- Ss work in pair : A : keeps the poster A B : keeps the poster B

School

Nguyen Du School

Class

7A

Forename

Van Kien

Surname

Tran

Address

66 Ham Long Street , Hanoi

Sex

Male

Age

12

Weight

41 kg

Height

140 cm

S1: Which school does he go to ?

S2: He goes to Nguyen Du school.

S1: Which class is he in ?

S2: He is in class 7A. 39

S1: What is his fore name ?

S2: His fore name is Van Kien S1: What is his surname ?

S2: His fore name is Tran S1: Where does he live ?

S2: He lives at 66 Han Rong Street, Ha Noi. S1: What is his age ?/ How old is he ?

S2: He is 12.

S1: What is his weight ?/ How much does he weigh ?

S2: 41 kg S1: How tall is he ?/ What is his height ?

S2: 140 cm.

4.Futher practice Survey - Have Ss work in group of 3 to ask and fill in the table Name

Male/female Age Weight

heigh

- Model with one student.

- Let Ss work in groups.

- Control and get feedback.

- Ask Ss to compare with their partner. If they are the same, it is good.

5.Production

- Homework:

- Ask Ss to write at home.

- Ask Ss to write at home

- Look at the form then write full sentences using - Look at the form then write full 40

the simple present tense

sentences using the simple present

- Learn by heart vocab and structure.

tense

- Do exercise A2,3 in the workbook - Prepare next lesson. Unit 11. Lesson 3. B1

Week: 24 Period: 68

UNIT 11 : KEEP FIT AND STAY HEALTHY Lesson 3 : B 1

Preparation date:9/2/2019 Teaching date : 16/2/2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , students will be able to practic reading skill about what is the matter / wrong with them and know something about the common cold .

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone., cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: T & Ss’ activities Contents 1- Warm-up: * Chatting: - Ask Ss some questions: + Where do you go when you are I go to the doctor . sick ? + Do you go to school when you are sick ? - No + Why ? .....................

- I may give to other 2- Pre-reading : -TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language 41

-Q: Self-made and confident a, Act 1 :Present some new vocabulary miming synonym realia example eliciting

B1 : Listen . Then practice : * New words: - headache (n ) : đau đầu I had a headache yesterday - sick = ill :ốm I am sick - sick note (n ) : giấy xin phép nghỉ ốm - cold (n ) :lạnh I had a cold last week - virus (n ) : bệnh nhiễm vi rút

- Check Vocab by meaning b, Act 2: Present the structure : had better +V(inf) to give advice * New structure: : had better +V(inf) to - Use the text to present: give + What does Mr. Tan advise Lan to do? advice Ss: You should stay inside at recess. eg: = You had better stay inside..

You should stay inside at recess. * Set the scene : (This is Mr Tan and Lan . = You had better stay inside..

He asked Lan why she didn’t go to school yesterday ( picture ) Form: : had better +V(inf) to give + Who are they? advice + What does she do? + Did she go to school yesterday? + What was the matter with her ?

- Ss answer and listen to the teacher’s explanation about the situation of the dialogue - Give the poster of questions. Ask Ss to read carefully and make sure they understand all.

3- While-reading(Practice reading to get information) -TM: Practising, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and Be responsible for yourself and everyone. * Practice the dialogue - Ask Ss to read the dialogue first - Ss read the dialogue between Mr Tan and * Answer the questions Lan in pairs a- Because she had a bad cold - Call on some pairs to read - Ask Ss to find out the answers by reading b- She had a headache c- Mr Tan told her to stay inside at recess in silence d- The doctor said that Lan had a virus - Ask Ss to ask and answer in pairs. Then e- The doctor wrote Lan’s sick note write the answers on board * Notice : 42

to ask / tell / advise sb to do sth 4- Post- reading(Practice retelling the content of the dialogue) - Ask Ss to continue sentences to retell the dialogue - Ask Ss to workk in pairs to make open dialogues.

*Retell the dialogue Lan didn’t go to school yesterday because ...

* Make open dialogues.

5.Production: - Homework - Ask Ss to do their homework.

- Do all the exercises in the workbook - Do all the exercises in the workbook part part A (P71,72) A (P71,72) Ex1: Write the sentences with “had Ex1: Write the sentences with “had better+ better+ inf” to give advice. inf” to give advice.

Ex2: Complete the conversation.

Ex2: Complete the conversation.

Ex3: Put the words in the correct order to Ex3: Put the words in the correct order to make questions. make questions.

Kiểm tra ngày11 tháng 2 năm 2019 ……………………………………… ………………………………………. ……………………………………….

43

Week: 25 Period:69

UNIT 11: KEEP FIT AND STAY HEALTHY Preparation date: 13/2/19 Lesson 5 : B 4 Teaching date : 20/2/2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , students will be able to read and understand about the most common cold ; its symptoms and how to prevent it .

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone., live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: T’s & Ss’ activities 1- Warm-up : Have ps do the game"net-works’’about some diseases -headache -Stomachache -Toothache -earache -cold Ask the ps some questions : Among these diseases you learned ,do

Contents 1.Warm up: Brainstorming cold

Diseases

- Introduce new words and new lesson.(Flu, stomatchache, headache) * Question and answer : 44

you know which disease is the most common ?

Do you often have common cold ?

Do you know what symptoms of the common cold are ?

What do you do to prevent it ?

- Yes , I have - tired / headache - take some medicines such as decolgen , tiffy ...

2- Pre-reading: -TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made be responsible for yourself and everyone * Present some new vocabulary I.B4- Read then answer the questions : - Give example to show the meaning 1. New words: + What are the symptoms of a cold ?

- disease (n ) = illness = sickness :bệnh tật + How do you feel when you catch a - symptom (n ) :triệu trứng common cold ? example + Do you take medicine ?

- runny nose (n) sổ mũi + Do they cure your cold ? picture - Check : Matching - slight fever (n) :sốt nhẹ example (37,50c ) - cough (v) :ho mime - sneeze (v) :hắt hơi picture - pleasant ( a ) >< unpleasant question - cure (v) :chữa,điều trị ( bệnh ) meaning - relieve (v) :làm giảm bớt,làm diu meaning - prevent (v) :ngăn chặn meaning - appear >< disappear (v) meaning *Introduce the topic of the text(Truefalse prediction ) Set the scene :You are going to read a passage about common cold .You read these sentences and quess which is true /false ?

3- While-reading Act1.Practice reading for gist.

2. True/false a.We call it the common cold because every year millions of people catch it (T) b.Every body knows the symtoms :a runny nose ,a slight lever …..(T) c.It’s very pleasant (F) d.There is a cure for the common cold (F) e. We can prevent a cold by eating well,doing ex ,keeping fit and staying healthy (T) 45

-TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made Have the ps read and check their preiction Call the ps to check Correct their mistakes and give them keys; a.T,b.T,c.F,d.F,e. T Act2.Practice reading for detail.

-Ask Ss to read all the questions first - Ss look through all the questions first - Have Ss read the text in silence - Ask Ss to find out the answers by reading in silence - Ask and answer . Then write the answer on board

3. Answer the questions: a- Because every year millions of people catch it b- They are : a runny nose , slight fever , coughing and sneezing . c- No , there is no cure for the common cold d- No , these medicines don’t cure a cold .

But they relieve the symptoms e- We can prevent a cold by eating well and doing exercise .

4. Retell the text.

4- Post- reading: - Ask Ss to continue sentences to retell the dialogue using 2 questions: Common cold -What are the symtoms of the cold?

- What do you do to prevent the  its symptoms common cold?  how to prevent .

- Repeat the passage in main details - Speak about the common cold : its symptoms, how to prevent 5.Production: 5. Homework: - Ask Ss to review three units to prepare - Consolidate from Unit 9 to unit 11 ; for the written test 45 minutes - Grammar points : The simple past tense Fill the medical form illness -------------------------------o0o-----------------------------Week: 25 REVISION Preparation date:15/2/2019 Period: 70 Teaching date : 22/2/2019 I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , students will be able to consolidate tenses and forms of verbs in the semester in order to do the language focus well .

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 46

3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone. willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Activities 1- Warm-up : - Pratice speaking to make meaningful sentences - Notice the verb form in each sentence - Ask Ss to give their remark in each of these sentences

Contents *Play a game of verb tense Ex : I often play video games in my free time .

He ....

They ...

Now , I .....

He ....

They ....

Yesterday , I ...

He ...

They ...

Tommorow, I ......

He ...

They ...

2- Presentation : Tenses of verbs -TM: Practising, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

I- Tenses : + Can you tell me how to recognize each tense ?

1- The simple present tense : - always ... never + Which adverb of time do they go with ?

- everyday / week / month .. / once / twice / 6 days a week - in the morning / afternoon / evening / in my free time .

47

+ Can you tell me the form ?

- Give out the posters. + Can you give examples ?

- Ask Ss to copy - Try to remember all of them

2- The present progressive : - now= at the moment = at present = right now - It’s 8 o’clock - Imperative : Look ! / Listen ! ...

- Where is Ba? 3- The simple past tense : - This morning / yesterday - last week / month / year ..

- ago / in 2000 4- The simple future tense : - This evening / tonight - tommorow / next week ..

Tense s Simpl e presen t

Affirmative

Negative

I/we / you/ they go He / she / it goes

don’t go doesn’t go

Prese nt progre ssive

I am going He/she/it is going we/you/they aregoing went played

am not is not are not

Am I Is he Are they

didn’t go didn’t play

will go

won’t go

Did you go Did you play Will you go

Simpl e past Simpl e future

3. Practice: Tenses of verbs -TM:Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident Practice: . Exercises : Give the correct verb form a Tenses of verbs 1- My brother ( buy ) ......... me a new watch - Ask Ss to do the exercise on poster on my last birthday .

1- bought 2- Hoa can’t go out with her friends at the 48

Introgati ve do you go does he go

moment because she ( study ) ........

3- How long you ( stay ) ....in Dalat last summer ?

- We ( stay )...... there for two weeks .

4- He ( start ) .......his job two months ago.

5- I ( not want )....... to get up this morning .

It ( be )....... very cold 6- Where ....... you ( be )... yesterday evening ?

- I ( be )........ at Nam’s house .

7- I ( go )...... to a movie last night , but I ( not enjoy ).........it . It ( not be ) ........... very good 8- I ( bring ) ............ my dictionary to the English class everyday , but yesterday. I ( forget )........

9- My mother ( like ) ....... ( cook ).........very much . She often ( cook ).........special dishes for us .

10-You must(stay).......in bed when you(be ).......... ill 4.Futher practice a.Make questions for the words underlined a.The hotel is opposite the museum. b.It’s about two kilometers from my house to the market. c.These envelopes are 5,000 dong. b.Complete the sentences with the correct prepositions: a.There is a supermarket ______ Nguyen Trai street. b.My house is _________ the bookstore and the school. c.There is a market _____ front of my school. d.I will ________ home all day. e.It takes 20 minutes _______ my house ________ school.

2- is studying 3- did you stay ?

- stayed 4- started 5- didn’t want was 6- were you - was 7- went / didn’t enjoy wasn’t 8- bring - forgot 9- likes / cooking cooks 10- stay / are

b. . a. Where is the hotel? b. How far is it from your house to the market? c. How much are these envelopes?

c. prepositions: . a. on b. between c. in d. at e. from / to

5.Production 49

- Ask Ss to : -Have Ss review these grammar points and words again.

* Homework: - Revise tenses of verbs - Prepare for the exam.

-Review from unit 9 to uint 11 to do the test 45â&#x20AC;&#x2122;.

Preparing date: 16/2/19 Teaching date: 23/2/19

week:25 Period:71 written test I. OBJECTIVES

1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to check themselves and do the tests better 2. Skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing 3. Attitude: - Students should revise the old lessons 4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, capacity to use language - Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: sensitive and responsible II. PREPARATIONS: 1.Teacher: copied papers, laptop 2.Students: pens III. MATRIX: IV. TEST: PART I : LISTEN 1.Listen to the passage about the Robinsonsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; vacation carefully then decide whether the following sentences are true or false.(1 pt) 1.The Robinsons returned to Ha noi by train.

2.This was the first time Liz saw the paddies.

3.They stopped at the restaurant for ten minutes.

4.Mrs Robinson bought some food for Liz. 2. Listen to the passage again then choose the best answer(1pt) 5.The Robinsons had a great holiday in................

A. Nha Trang B.Da Lat C. Hue 6. Liz was ........... as the bus drove through the countryside.

A. sad B. excited C.tired 50

7.Everything looked calm and.....................

A.peaceful B.peace C. noisy 8.The bus stopped at a small roadside restaurant at ............o’clock.

A.2 B. 3 C.4 PART II: GRAMMAR AND VOCAB 1.Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the rest.(1pt) 9. a. laughed b. looked c. collected d. missed 10. a. asked b. missed c. called d. cooked b. measured c. ironed d. talked 11. a. changed 12. a. decided b. loved c. wanted d. started 2. Circle the best option A, B, C or D to complete each of (2pts).

13. Ba ________ to school yesterday because he felt tired.

A. doesn’t go B. wasn’t go C. didn’t go 14.What is his ____________ ? – 60 kg A. heavy B. weighed C. weight 15.Minh’s tooth hurt _________ he has a cavity.

A. but B. and C. or 16.They ________ a lot of gifts for their friends yesterday.

A. bought B. buy C. buys 17.Did your aunt make this dress for you? – No, she _____ A. don’t B. doesn’t C. isn’t 18.Tri Nguyen ________ is a famous place in Nha Trang.

A. Temple B. Museum C. Aquarium 19.I learn how _________ care of myself.

A. take B. to take C. taking 20.Mrs Anh takes care of people’s hair. She is a ________ A. dressmaker B. hairdresser C. hairmaker

the following sentences

D. not went D. height D. because D. buying D. didn’t D. Pagoda D. took D. head

PART IV: READ 1. Read the passage, then check true (T) or False (F).(1pt) There is only one disease called common : the common cold. We call it the common cold because every year millions of people catch it. Everybody knows the symptoms : a runny nose, a slight fever, coughing and sneezing. It’s very unpleasant, but nobody knows a cure. Medicines called cold “cures” don’t cure a cold, but they do relieve the symptoms. Whatever you do, your cold will last for a few days and then disappear.

21. Every year, millions of people catch the common cold.

22. After a few days, your cold will disappear.

51

23. Everybody knows how to cure the common cold.

24. Medicines called cold â&#x20AC;&#x153;curesâ&#x20AC;? can relieve the symptoms 2.Read the passage carefully and answer questions by choose the best answer( 1pt) Mai was born in Hue , but now she lives in Ha Noi with her aunt and uncle. She went to Ha Noi two years ago. Now she studies at Quang Trung school. In her new school, she has a lot of friends.

Yesterday was her thirteenth birthday. She had a small party with her friends.

They ate a lot of food and fruits. In the evening Mai had a stomachache, so her aunt very worried. She took Mai to the hospital. The doctor said that Mai ate too much candy and fruit. Today, Hoa has to stay at home.

Questions: 25.Where was Mai born ?

A. Hue B. Nha Trang C. Ha Noi 26.Which school does she go to now ?

A. Quang Trung B. Tran Hung Dao C. Nguyen Sieu 27.What did Mai and her friends eat yesterday ?

A. rice B. candy and fruit.

C. bread 28.Why did she have a stomachache ?

A. Because she went to bed early.

B. Because she ran quickly.

C. Because she ate too much candy and fruit.

PART IV: WRITE 1.Find the mistakes in these sentences(1pt) 29. My bedroom is more bigger than my sister's.

A B C D 30. My uncle grow vegetables and raises cattle on his farm A B C D 31. Do you know how much a banana cost ?

A B C D 32. I go to the library three times every week.

A B C D 2. Write about 40-50 words to talk about your last holiday. These questions will help you(2pts) 1. Where did you do?

2. Who did you go with?

3. What was the weather like?

4. What did you visit?

5. How was the food?

6. What did you buy?

7. How did you feel?

8. What did you like best about the trip?

----------THE END--------52

V. KEY: 1. 0,25 p for each correct sentences Sentence

Key

Sentence

Key

1 F 17 D 2 T 18 C 3 T 19 B 4 T 20 B 5 A 21 T 6 B 22 T 7 A 23 F 8 C 24 T 9 A 25 A 10 C 26 A 11 D 27 B 12 B 28 C 13 C 29 A 14 C 30 A 15 D 31 D 16 A 32 D WRITE:.Write at least 5 sentences about yourself: 0.4 p for each correct sentences (Tape: Unit 9 –A3)(Mã đề 2 – đảo xáo trộn các câu) V. PRODUCTION: - Ask Sts to do the exercises in the exercise book.

- Prepare for the next period.

---------------------- o0o --------------------Week: 26 Period:72

UNIT 12 : LET’S EAT Lesson 1 : A 1

Preparation date:20/2/2019 Teaching date : 27/2/2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , students will be able to know about going shopping and how to choose goof food and express their agreements using ‘ too , so , either , neither’

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: 53

- General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

Love family, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s and students’ activities Content 1- Warm-up : - Poster of those things chicken ...

* Find out and put ords in the right column: Food Vegetables Fruit chicken carrot banana meat cabbage apple beef onion orange

2- Presentation: Act 1.Present some new words.

-TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident - Pre-teach some new vocabulary using picture ,explaination, Tran,antonym and synonym.

- Have the sts to read and write the new words.

- Check vocab: matching Act2.Present the new structure of agreement:too/so/either/neither * Explain the new structure of agreement by giving them the example.

- Give example clearly - If you have the same idea , you can use this 3- Practice :(Practice reading the dialogue

A1 : Listen and read : - pork (n): thịt lợn meat from pig - spinach (n): rau mâm xôi vegetable ( meaning ) - cucumber(n):quả dưa chuột picture - durian (n): quả sầu riêng meaning - papaya (n): quả đu đủ picture - select (v) : lựa chọn choose - selection (n ) : sự lựa chọn choice - ripe (a) >< green II.New structures: * Agreement : (+) I like chicken ( do you like chicken ? ) I do , too / so do I (-) I don’t like durian ( Do you like it ? ) I don’t , either / Neither do I

-TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be 54

responsible for yourself and everyone.

- Ask ps to read the dialogue in pairs - Call on some pairs to read - Speak out the agreement in the dialogue - Give the example first - Ask ps to make similar dialogues - Talk about the things they like or dislike -Ask and answer

4.Futher practice Practice talking about the food or drink they like or don’t like.

- I like chicken . Do you like them ?

- Yes , I like them , too .

- No , I don’t like them 5.Production -Do the ex 2,3(74):make sentences with too,so /either,neither .

A1 : Ask and answer : Questions

a.What did Hoa and her aunt buy at the market? b.Does Hoa like pork? How about her aunt? c.What meat they like for dinner? d.What are the favorite vegetables of Hoa’s aunt? e.What fruit did they buy? f.Why didn’t they buy a papaya and pineapple? * Answer key: a.They bought spinach, cucumbers, some carrots, some beef b. No, she doesn’t. neither does she c.They ‘d like some beef d.The favorite vegetables of Hoa’s aunt are spinach and cucumbers e.They bought Some oranges f.Because they hate the smell of it - Control and get feedback.

-------------------------------o0o----------------------------Week: 26 Period:73

Unit 12. Let’s eat.

Lesson 2. A2

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge 55

Preparation date: 22/2/2019 Teaching date : 1/3/2019

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practise structure “ I don’t like ……either, I like,…….too., Neither do I, so do I” to express preference.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

Love family, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s and students’ activities Content I.Warm up: Network

1.Warm up: Network

- Have Ss work in 3 teams to go to the board and - Have Ss work in 3 teams to go to the board and write the words about vegatables, food, fruit they write the words about vegatables, food, fruit they have learnt have learnt

food

food fruit

fruit

vegetables

vegetables

2.Presentation: -TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident - Presentation dialogue

II.New lesson Ex : I like apples . Do you like them ?

Yes , I like apples , too .

Yes , so do I No , I don’t like apples / No , I don’t

56

- Talk about the food or drink you like or don’t like . * Ask your partner then fill the table

- Have Ss practise dialogue again - Elicit and give model sentences S1: I like spinach and cucumbers S2: So do I / I do ,too S1: I don’t like pork

Names Viet Lan …. …. ….

S2: Neither do I / I don’t either

* Concept check: meaning form use pronunciation

3..Practice: -TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and be responsible for yourself and everyone

Likes chicken carrot .….

Dislikes fish cabbages

- Work in pairs - Listen and repeat the model.

III.Structure -Translate the model S + auxiliary verb + too So + auxiliary verb + S S + auxiliary verb + not + either Neither + auxiliary verb + S Use: Dïng ®Ó diÔn t¶ sù ®ång t×nh kh¼ng ®Þnh vµ phñ ®Þnh.

Work in pairs Example exchange

“Picture drill” - Prepare some pictures of vegatables food and fruit

IV.Practice * Picture of carrots

- Give model and ask Ss practise in pairs - Have Ss work in pairs to practise

S2: So do I/ I do too * Picture of beef S1: I don’t like beef.

S2: neither do I/ I don’t either * Example: S1: I like fish. Do you like it?

S1: I like corrots

S2: Yes I like it, too / So do I

4.Further practice: 57

“Survey” - Have Ss work in groups of 3 to take a survey and complete the table Name

Fish Chicken Carrots peas

5.Production Ask ss to say again the usage of the expression.

Give feedback - Do exercise A2 in the workbook - Prepare next lesson. Unit 12. Lesson 3.

Week: 26 Period:74

UNIT 12 : LET’S EAT Lesson 3: : A 3a ,4

Preparation date:23/2/2019 Teaching date : 2/3/2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , students will be able to know how to prepare / cook a meal ( some dishes such as : stir-fried beef , boiled vegetables ) They can write about what they ate yesterday.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

Love family, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s and students’ activities Content I. Warm up.

1. Warm up.

58

“Find someone who”

“Find someone who”

- Give instruction and check.

- Have Ss play in groups of ten.

Do you like........?

Name Apples Papaya Mango Durian Cucumber Beef Pork Chicken Which is the most favorite fruit / food in the class?

- Control and get feedback.

- Give instruction and check.

- Have Ss play in groups of ten.

Do you like........?

Name Apples Papaya Mango Durian Cucumber Beef Pork Chicken Which is the most favorite fruit / food in the class?

- Control and get feedback.

* Ordering Pictures - Put the pictures in the right stages of cooking that dish as for you

* Ordering Pictures : - How to make stir-fried beef with green pepper and onions : - Picture a , c , d , e ...( up to the students )

2- Pre- reading : (Introduce the situation of the reading text and present some new vocabulary )

-TM: discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

-Have the sts practice reading new words - Check vocab by matching with picture .

II.Reading Vocab - green pepper picture - salt real - soy sauce meaning - spoon real v- slice picture - heat - hot (a ) - add = put sth more - set the table >< clear the table picture

3- While- reading:(Practice reading to get information)

-TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

59

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be III.Answer the questions responsible for yourself and everyone.

-Have the sts read and write down: - What did she do first ? / next / finally ?

- What did she do to make boiled spinach ?

- Read the text again then answer the questions - Find out the menu -Have the sts find out the recipe to cook a meal or a dish .

4- Post-reading(Practice talking about the process of making stir-fried beef ) -Have the sts retell the stages of making the stir-fried beef . * Futher practice writing what they ate or drank yesterday) - What did you eat yesterday ?

- What did you drink ?

- Ask ps to write what they ate and drank yesterday .

*What Hoa’s aunt did: 1- Slice the beef 2 - Slice the green peppers and onions 3- Heat the pan .

4- Stir-fry the beef .

5- Add green pepper and onions

* Answer the questions : a- They had some rice , stir-fried beef , cucumber salad and boiled spinach - The menu: rice , boiled spinach,stir-fried beef , cucumber salad . * Retell the process of making stir-fried beef - Use : first / next / after that / then / finally

A 4: Write .what did you eat and drink yesterday ?

- I ate ... and drank ... for breakfast .

- I ate ... and drank ... for lunch .

- I ate ... and drank ... for dinner .

- Discuss in group and share with their partner - Compare with one another about the food you ate yesterday

5.Production - Ask ps to read the text again.

-Do the ex5 (Write true sentences about you )

Week: 27 Period: 75

UNIT 12 : LET’S EAT Lesson 4 : B1

Preparation date:27/2/2019 Teaching date : 6/3/2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , students will be able to know some information of cooking and eating sensibly to take care of themselves .

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

60

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

Love family, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s and students’ activities 1. Warm-up : + It is a kind of vegetable - Ask Ss to guess the letter .

Content I. Warm-up : * Hangman : S

P

I N

A

C

H

2- Pre- reading:

-TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident * Present some new vocabulary - Use some techniques to teach vocab antonym synonym translation - Check : ROR * Set the scene:Introduce the situation of the reading.

- Show the picture: + Who are they? + Where is Ba? + What do you think how he feels?

- Ask Ss to read the story and predict the missing words.

- Get Ss’ predictions.

3- While- reading:(Practice reading to get information.)

B 1 : Listen . Then practice with a partner : * New words: - dirty ( a ) : bẩn >< clean - dirt ( n ) :bụi bẩn,bụi đất - probably ( adv ) = may be - careful (a ) :cẩn thận - carefully (adv )

II.Reading * Nowadays many kinds of food and vegetables are poisonous so remember to wash them well / carefully before cooking .

-TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

61

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone. * Answer the questions - Read the dialogue, Ss listen and answer: + What did Ba eat last night but his parents didn’t ? + Did he wash it well ? + What did the doctor explain to Ba ?

- Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs to check their predictions.

4- Post-reading:(Practice completing the story and retelling) - Hang on the poster - Ask Ss to work individually to complete the story - Ask Ss to share it with their partner - Call on 2 Ss to write the story on the board then correct.

- spinach - No - Spinach is good , but he must wash it carefully ... makes him sick .

III.Practice the dialogue * Complete the story 1- doctor 2- sick / ill 3- asked 4- ate 5- spinach 6- wash

7- carefully / well 8- vegetables 9- make 10- she / the doctor 11- medicines

IV* Retell the story - Ask Ss to work in groups to retell the story.

5.Production - Ask Ss to write at home

- Write a similar story in the note-book then try to retell it .

- Write what you learn from the dialogue

- Do exercise B1 in the workbook - Prepare next lesson. Unit 12. Lesson 5. B2.

Week: 27 Period: 76

UNIT 12 : LET’S EAT Lesson 5 : B2,4

Preparation date:1/3/2019 Teaching date : 8/3/2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , students will be able to know a balanced diet meal and know how to eat sensibly to keep fit and stay healthy .

- Listen to write the food they hear.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

62

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

Love family, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s and students’ activities I- Warm-up:

Content

I- Warm-up: * Chatting Ask ss some questions about the food they like to eat - What do you like to eat?

- Do you like eating sugar ?

- How much do you eat? * Hangman : + It is an adj from the noun “ health” - Ask Ss to guess the letters.

* Hangman : H

E

A L

T

H

Y

2- Pre- reading:

-TM: Play game, practising, -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident * Present some new vocabulary - Use some techniques to teach vocab

- Check : “ What and Where”

II.Reading B2 * New words: - balanced diet (n ) :chê độ ăn kiêng eat variety of food - moderate (a ) :vừa phải = sensible - moderation (n ) - affect (v) :ảnh hưởng meaning - body-building meaning + picture in B3 - diary product (n ) sth made from milk - cereal (n) things like rice , corn .

- guideline (n) instruction - energy (n) :năng lượng meaning

* Set the scene: Introduce the situation * True/ false statements of the reading text.’’Today we are going 1. The food we eat affects our life.

63

to know some information about a balanced diet meal’’ - Show the poster of statements and predict .

- Ss look at the poster and do them

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

There is sugar in many kinds of food Sugar is an unhealthy food Sugar gives you energy.

Sugar adds taste to food A balanced diet means you eat a variety of food...

7. We don’t need exercise.

3- While- reading:(Practice reading to get information )

-TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and be responsible for yourself and everyone.

- Ask Ss to read the text to check the statements.

- Have Ss work in pairs to exchange the answers.

- Check and correct.

- Have Ss work in pairs to answer the questions.

- Ss read the text then answer the questions - Check and correct.

- Have Ss discuss in group and answer the questions with “ Why” 4- Post-reading:(Practice writing about what you eat every day) -Ask Ss to write individually then compare with their partner *.Listen - Pre- listening:(Introduce the situation of the listening text ) - Point to the picture then ask : + What is it ? + What are they ?

- Ss call on the name of the food or drink in the pictures.

- a--> f : food - g , h : drink - Ask Ss to predict the things they ate or drank Ex : I think Lan ate rice , vegetables and drank water .

- Get Ss’ prediction.

Answer keys: 1:T 5.T 2.T 6.T 3.F 7.F 4.T * Answer the questions a- It adds taste to the food and it gives energy b- No , Because you can’t have healthy life without exercising c- It is up to the students . ( look at B3 ) * Write what you eat every day - Choose the suitable food for your meal to make a balanced diet meal

B 4 : Listen : * Predictions: Food / drinks a- rice b- noodles c- fish

64

Lan

Ba x

x

Nga x

Hoa x

x

d- vegetable e- fruit f- beef g- juice h- water While- listening:(Practice reading to get information) - Play the tape 1st time - The second time.

- Ss listen to the tape then write the letter / check tick on the poster - Ask them to compare with their partner to check.

- Listen again then check who is right then correct it .

- Ss repeat what they ate and drank - Ask Ss to compare with their predctions.3 Post-listening:(Practice talking about themselves ) - Ask Ss to talk about what they ate and drank yesterday follow the example - Have Ss freely to talk

5.Production -Ask Ss to : Learn by heart vocab and

translate the text.

- Do exercise B2 in the work book - Prepare next lesson. Language focus 4

x

x x

x x

x x

x

x

* Answers: Lan: f, b,d, g Ba: c, a, e, h Nga: a, d ,g Hoa: b, e, g

Ex : Lan ate some noodles , vegetables , and beef . She drank some juice - Ba ...

- Nga ..

- Hoa ... * About you: Yesterday, I ate...................

I drink................

- Learn new words - Write your own menu for three meals a day : breakfast / lunch / dinner *.Production -Ask Ss to : Learn by heart vocab and

translate the text.

- Do exercise B2 in the work book - Prepare next lesson. Language focus 4

LANGUAGE FOCUS 4 Week: 27 Preparation date: 1/ 3/2019 Period: 77 Teaching date : 9/3/2019 I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , students will be able to review some grammar points such as : The simple past tense . Making agreement . and how to use imperatives to speak about the process of making cucumber salad .

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing

3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

65

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: The T’s & sts’activities The contents I. Warm-up: 1- Warm-up: Theory.

Theory.

G1 went

- Have Ss play agame of verbs - Ask Ss to go to the board and write

Verbs go watch eat read play drink

G2 went

2- Presentation.

Act1. Revise the past simple tense.

-TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

- Ask Ss to repeat the form and the use II.Grammar of the simple past tense 1, Past simple tense: - Ask them to give examples.

Eg: I went to the zoo yesterday. +,S +Ved+O........

- ,S+did not +V+O ?,Did +S+V+...?yes /No..... (?) Did you go to the zoo yesterday?

Yes, I did.

Act2.Revise the Indefinite quantifiers No, I did’nt.

-Ask Ss to retell: Indefinite quantifiers 2.Indefinite quantifiers. and how to use them. + a little: DT không đếm được.

-Have the sts give the example. + lots of / a lot of :DT đếm được,và không 66

Act3.Revise the agreement:too,so ,either,neither.

- Give example to show the use of those words - Ideas (+) : , too . / so ...

(-) : , either . / neither

Act4.Revise the imperatives.

- Present some verbs in the box.

-Guide the sts how to use the imperative.

3.Practice: -TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

-Have the sts do the exercises in the book page:123-128.

Act1.Practice the simple past tense: - Point to the picture then ask and answer - Ask Ss to work in pairs to look at the pictures to ask and answer. Practice asking and answering using the simple past tense in affirmative , negative and introgative sentences .

- Exphazize on the verbs.

- Call on some pairs to do and check.

Act2.Practice the Indefinite quantifiers.:

- Ask Ss to complete the dialogues using indefinite quantifiers - Check and correct ( closed pairs)

đếm được. + too much: Dt không đếm được.

3. Too, so either neither.

Sts1:I like banannas.

Sts2: I like bananas, too./ So do I Sts1: I don’t like bananas.

Sts2: I don’t like bananas, either./ Neither do I -> Too, so: Biểu đạt sự đồng tình cho câu khẳng định either, neither: Biểu đạt sự đồng tình cho câu phủ định 4. Imperative: Eg: Slice the beef Add salt to the spinach.

III.Exercises: 1- The simple past tense : ex : Did you do your homework last night ?

- No , I didn’t . I watched TV b.S1: Did you eat dinner at home on Wednesday?

S2: No, I didn’t. I had dinner in a restaurant. c.S1: Did you go to shool yesterday?

S2: No, I didn’t. I went to the movie theater yesteday. d.S1:Did you watch a video on the weekend ?

S2: No, I didn’t. I read a book on the weekend. e. S1: Did you play basketball yesterday ?

S2: No, I didn’t. I played football yesterday.

2- Indefinite quantifiers : a- Write the correct expression : A : a little coffee B : a lot of tea C : a ot of salt D : a little sugar E : too much coffee b- Complate the dialogues : - Work in pair to complete the dialogues using 67

4.Futher practice Act3.Practice the agreement: too ,so ,either , neither.

- Ss look at the pictures . Make similar dialogues .Beginning with I like ... or: I don’t like ...

Use : a little / lots of / a lot of or too much.

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to write.

- Call on some pairs to do.

- Check and correct.

Act4.Practice making imperatives.

- Ask Ss to look at the pictures then speak out the ways of making cucumber salad - Ask Ss to retell how to make the cucumber salad

the indefinite quantifiers and pictures A . A little .......... a lot a little B. a lot of C. too much D. a little 3- Agreement : *Too , so Ex : - I like mangoes . ( do you like them ? ) - I like mangoes , too / So do I * either , neither Ex: - I don’t like durian . ( don’t you like them ?

- I don’t like durians , either / Neither do I

4- Imperatives : Making cucumber salad : - ingredients : - peel (v ) - stir (v) - mix (v ) / mixture (n ) - Giving imperatives : e- add a- peel f- stir b- wash g- wait c- slice d- mix

5.Production - Learn all grammar points - Give five sentences of : so , too , either ,neither - Write the instructions on how to cook rice.

Preparing date: 6/3/19 Teaching date:13/3/19 FEEDBACK ON TEST 45’ CREATIVE EXPERIENCE ACTIVITIES OUR TRADITONAL DISH (Start the innovative experience) I./. Objectives 1. Knowledge: After getting back the test papers, students will be able to evaluate their knowledge and have a plan for the next time By the end of the lesson, students will be able to create a recipe for a favourite dish.

68

Week:28 Period:78

2. Skills: - To correct Ssâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; errors if necessary - Creative when expressing the product, have know about instruction on cooking a dish with proper English.

3. Attitude: - Be aware of local traditional food and its nutrition.

- Know how to preserve their products - Interested in learning and attending.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, â&#x20AC;Ś - Specilized capacity: develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Love their home, family and country II./.PREPARATION: 1.Teacher: English 6 laptop, projector 2.Students: A0, A4 white papers, hard-edged, color papers, pencils, glues, scissors III./.Procedure 1- Warm up - How are you today?

- Are you ready for getting back the test papers?

2- Teacher's idea * Priority: - Ss do the part " choose the best answer " and writing well.

- Ss try their best to get good marks.

- Ss know how to do the test, present well, true request.

- Ss understand vocabularies, language focus. *Defect: - Some Ss have many mistakes about using vocabularies.

- Some Ss have many mistakes about writing sentences, using structure.

- Some Ss have many mistakes about showing.

- Some Ss copy other exams 3- Pay the test paper back to ss - Ss look at the tests and do the tests again by themselves.

- Ss find their mistakes by themselves.

- Ss share and compare with a partners.

-T asks Ss to work in pairs +S1 corrects mistakes of S2's test + S2 corrects mistakes of S1's test - T calls - Ss answer one by one 4- T gives ss the answer key -T: Gives the aims of the exercise from the test.

-Ss: Listen -T: Asks Ss to give the answers they did.

-Ss: Give the answers they did or write on board -T: Gives the correct answers.

69

-Ss: Listen and correct the mistakes -T: Explains some knowledge and the answers Key: -

Spend time with students to ask questions about their tests, their points.

T asks Ss write key in notebook and correct their mistakes by themselves.

Teacher and studentsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; activities 5.1.Find information T-M: Work in group of 6-8 students.

C: self-learning ability, communication capacity Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

Love their home, family and country - Guide Ss work in group to find information in textbooks

Contents

-Each member in groups read Unit 12: Letâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s eat to have background about a favourite dish .

- Discuss about name of food, ingredients and verbs to make - Discuss about name of food, dishes and put information into ingredients and verbs to make dishes the table and put information into the table.

- Ss work in groups to discuss and reach - Find information in other materials agreement on the dish + Select the dishes( local - Guide Ss how to use their computer to traditional food in VN) + Searches the dishes on the search the information Internet or cooking magazines. .

5.2. Process the collected information T-M: Work in group of 6-8 students.

C: Self-learning ability, communication capacity Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

- Discuss and agree about ingredients and instruction to Love their home, family and country make the favourite traditional -Asks Ss to identify keywords dish.

- Confirm selected information into mind map towards contents.

-Remind Ss of paying attention to + Name of the food + Ingredients support mind map + Verbs for cooking + Steps for cooking 5.3. Create posters or video clips to present the recipe for the dish.

70

T-M: Work in group of 6-8 students.

C: self-learning ability, communication capacity Q: Love their home, family and country - Ss work in group to discuss and agree on the form of presentation: by posters or video clips.

-T provides support on the way of presenting posters or making video clips by giving necessary information.

+ Discuss and develop the ideas of presentation -The group discuss and agree on the form of presentation: by posters or video clips.

- The group leader allocates the tasks to group members

+ Design the products - Arrange time for group to design their poster or video clips - T provides any support on the way of decorating or presenting if the Ss ask - Inform the deadline for hand in products and way of display

- The group display and decorate the product in form of posters or video clips.

6-Production: - Redo the test in the notebook - Prepare new lesson

Week: 28 Period: 79

UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES Lesson 1: A 1

Preparation date: 8/3/2019 Teaching date : 15/3/ 2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , students will be able to name some sports and know how to take a survey and they also know the top ten sport games in American schools

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 71

3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s and students’ activities Content 1. Warm-up: + Which sports do you like ? + Do you know which sports American students like best ?

* Questions and answers : - I like soccer - I like badminton - I like tennis - Guess : basketball ...

2- Pre- reading:

-TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident * Present some new vocabulary.

- Use some techniques to teach vocab

- Check : ROR * Introduce the situation of the reading

A 1 : Listen and read: a, New words: - survey (n):khảo sát - result (n) :kết quả meaning - choice (n) :sự lựa chọn choose (v) - baseball (n) :môn bóng chày explanation - skate boarding (n) :trượt ván explanation - roller-skating (n) :trượt patanh( giầy có bánh xe nằm dọc dưới đế giầy ) picture - roller-blading (n) trượt patanh(sử dụng giầy trượt có bánh xe ở 4 góc) : picture - athletics (n):điền kinh /thể thao meaning

72

text.

- Set the scene : Here are the top ten sport games in American schools - Ask Ss to guess the position.

- Get Ss’ guessing.

- Read the text.

- Listen to the tape then check their guessing 3- While- reading:(Practice reading to get information.)

-TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

- Have Ss read the text in silence to check their predictions. Then compare with a partner.

- Ask Ss to write down the positions of ten sports - Have Ss read the questions then read the text again to find the answers to the questions.

4- Post-reading:(Practice taking a survey.)

- Hang on the poster - Ask Ss to draw in their note-book the table like A1 - Ss work in groups then add up all sport games . Find out the position of at least 10 sport games - Compare with other groups - The monitor counts and give the positions of their group

5.Production - Ask Ss to:

- Write the foods you bought at the market yesterday Week: 28

b, Guess the position

c, Answer the questions a- Yes / No ( depend on students’ ) b- Students’ ideas

A2 : Take a survey : Sport

Number of Ss Position

Soccer Badminton Volleyball Baseball Football Swimming Athletics Table tennis Basketball Roller-skating Rollerblading -Learn ten sport games - Do exercise in the work book

UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES

73

Preparation date: 9/3//2019

Period: 80

Lesson 2 : A 3 , 5

Teaching date : 16/3/2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , students will be able to know how to use adjectives and adverbs in a sentence . Then practice some exercises .

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: The T’s & sts’ activities 1- Warm-up:

The contents * Hangman :

+ hot / cold / big / small are called this

A

D

J E

C T

I V E

2- Presentation:

-TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made, be responsible for yourself Act1.Present some new vocabulary - Use some techniques to teach vocab

- Check vocab by picture and make up sentences

A 1 : Listen then practice with a partner: a, New words: adjs :- safe >< dangerous - slow >< quick - good >< bad - skillful(adj):điêu luyện,có kỹ thuật eg: - He is a good soccer player - He is skillful volleyball player - She is a slow swimmer - She is a bad tennis player

74

Act2. Present adjectives and adverbs of maner) + When do you use an adjective ? + Where is it in a sentence ? + When do you use adverb ? + Where is it in a sentence ? + How to form an adverb from an adjective?

- Ask Ss to practice speaking first - Ss practice speaking in two ways 3- Practice : (Practice adjectives and adverbs of maner)

-TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

- Present some new vocabulary - Use some techniques to teach vocab - Emphasize on their meanings

- Check: What and Where.

b, Advers of maner * Change these sentences using adverb - He / she plays well skillfully badly * Compare : He plays well He is a good player *Formation: adj - ly --> adv c, Practice with a partner.

A5 : Write : a, New words.

- improve (v ) :cải thiện ,nâng cao make sth better - aware (a ) / awareness (n ) :nhận thấy,có ý thức - aim = purpose (n) - lifeguard (n) :người cứu hộ meaning - obey (v):vâng lời = follow sth - accident = risk : tai nạn,rủi ro meaning

- Ask Ss to write by changing adjectives into adverbs to complete the passage about water safety awareness

4.Further practice. * Write (A5) - Have Ss work in pairs to change adjs in blankets to adverbs - Give feedback - Ask Ss to work individually to write the whole passage in the notebook.

5 Production : - Ask some questions: + What is the aim of the program ? + What should ( n’t ) children do ?

- Read the passage first then answer

b, Write to complete the passage using adverb - clear - clearly - carefull - carefully - safe - safely - careless - carelessly - strict - strictly V- Homework - Retell what children should do to improve water safety awareness - Give 5 examples using both adjectives and

75

some questions - Retell what children should do to improve water safety awareness - Give 5 examples using both adjectives and adverbs

adverbs

Kiểm tra ngày 11 tháng 3 năm 2019 ……………………………………………………. …………………………………………………… …………………………………………………….. …………………………………………………….

Week: 29 Period: 81

UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES Lesson 3: A 4

Preparation date: 13/3/2019 Teaching date : 20/3/2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , students will be able to know something about walking for fun in a school and help them to think over about what they should do .

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 76

3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s and students’ activities 1- Warm-up: + Do you ever go jogging ? + How do you go to school everyday ? + Do you think walking is good ? .................

2- Pre-reading:

-TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident * Present some new vocabulary - Use some techniques to teach vocab

Content * Questions and answers : - Yes / No - By bike / walk - Yes

A 4 : Read then answer the question: a, New words - compete (v) meaning - competition (n ) :cuộc thi,cuộc đua - competitor (n) = participant :nhóm người tham gia - prize (n):giải ,giải thương the first prize - wish (v):ước,ước mong - increase (v) :tăng lên more and more

- Check vocab by ROR - Try to remember new vocab *Introduce the situation of the reading text.

- Set the scene : We are going to learn about an activity that a school organizes called : walking - Have Ss to read the questions in the text book in silence.

- Make sure they understand all the

77

questions.

3- While-reading:(Practice answering the questions about the reading text.

-TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made, be responsible for yourself and everyone. Love family, b, Answer the questions friends and country - Ask Ss to answer the following questions: + How many competitions are there ? + What are they ?

- Ask Ss to read the text silently - Ss read the text again then answer the questions in details - Ask Ss to find out the answer for all questions then exchange with a partner.

- Call on some Ss to answer - Give more details or correct them

+ There are two + Walking for fun and walking to school day a- walking for fun / walking b- His school team won the first prize and they were happy to keep this kind of activity c- a 5 km to the beach on sunday morning and walk-to-school day d- 5 kms e- wednesday f- members living near the school

4. Post reading : - Answer the question: a. He takes part in walking. b. Because they won the first prize in a district walking competition and they wished to keep his activity. c. The two activities of the club are a 5 km walk to the beach on Sunday mornings and a walk-to-school day on Wednesdays d. It’s 5 kilometers.

5. Production:

- Get Ss to desbribe how Hoa’s aunt makes a meal.

- Ask Ss to : Write full answers in the book - Do exercises part A in the workbook

Week: 29 Period: 82

c, Retell the main content of the text - Write full answers in the book - Do exercises part A in the workbook

-------------------------------o0o----------------------------UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES Preparation date: 15/3/2019 Lesson 4 : B 1 , 2 Teaching date : 22/3/2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge 78

By the end of the lesson , students will be able to make a polite request using “ Would you like..” and know how to accept or refuse the invitation.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

Love family and country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s and students’ activities 1- Warm-up: - Use pictures and situations - Ask Ss to find more ways to give suggestions.

- accept - refuse

“ Wordsquare” - Give a poster with letters and ask Ss to work in 2 teams - Ss have to cirle the words they have learnt - Tell Ss the winner is the team has more right words T A B L E

A F E D M

E T F L E

H E O U A

T R R O L

E J E H S

E T H S U

Content I.Warm-up: * Giving suggestions : - Let’s play soccer - Why don’t we play soccer ?

- What / How about playing soccer ?

- Would you like to play soccer ? + Yes , I’d love / like to + I’d like / love to . But I can’t / I’m sorry , I can’t .

“ Wordsquare” Answer key: Table tennis Brush teeth After, before, meals, adult, swim, thin Can, should, eat

79

T E N

H A N

I D I

N U S

A L W

C T I

R B M

2- Presentation:

-TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and be responsible for yourself and everyone.

II.Listening a, Activity 1 ( Present new words) picture synonym translation - Check: R & R a, Activity 2 ( Revise modal verbs) - Use picture to set the scene - Present grammar by using the text and situations.

- Play the tape - Write some expressions on board - Ask Ss to make sentences using modal verbs.

B1. Listen. Then practice with a partner : a, New words table tennis paddles (n):vợt bóng bàn spare (a) : dự phòng= free (a) problem (n):vấn đề

b, Grammar : Modal verbs eg: - I ought to finish it - You must do your homework first - I also have to finish this question for math ought to : nen ( khuyen bao) must : phai ( bat buoc) have to :

3- Practice: ( Practice modal vebs)

-TM: Practising, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

- Ask Ss to read in pairs - Ss practice reading in pairs *Read and answer the question.

- Ask Ss to read the questions carefully.

Make sure they understand all.

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to answer some questions - Practice asking and answering the questions in pairs - Call on some pairs to ask and answer.

4.Further practice * Listen then practice : - Play the tape to model first - Hang on the poster the dialogue between Ba and Nam

III.Practice c, Practice the dialogue d, Answer the questions a- He must finish his homework b- In a few minutes c- Ba will finish his math question. g- Two

B2 : Listen then practice :

80

- Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs - Ask Ss to notice the underlined parts - Ask Ss to replace words or phrase to make similar dialogues .

- Call on some pairs to speak out - Correct their pronunciation.

5- Production - Ask Ss to think about the words or situations of their own then make up similar dialogues.

- Ss work in pairs to practice.

- Write three dilogues in your note-book - Do exercise A, B 1 in the workbook

Week:29 Period: 83

Note: Degree : might - should - ought to - must

* Make your own dialogues: Tomorrow is Sunday so you invite your friends to do sth or to go somewhere with you - Write three dilogues in your note-book - Do exercise A, B 1 in the workbook

UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES Lesson 5 : B 3 Test 15 minutes (No4)

Preparation date:16/3/2019 Teaching date : 23/3/2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , students will be able to read a text to discover the ocean and underwater life to answer the questions. They also know some special and useful inventions to help discovering the sea and use some modal verbs in sentences .

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

Love family and country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: I.Test 15’ Teacher’s and students’ activities Content 2- Pre-reading:

-TM: Play game, practising 81

-C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and be responsible for yourself and everyone.

- Ask Ss some questions about the picture in the book. + Where is it? + Do you ever see someone dive in the sea ?

B3 : Read then answer the questions :

a, Activity 1. Pre-teach some new vocab: - Use some technique to teach vocab

a, New words: - surface (n) : bề mặt picture - land (n) :đất drawing - ocean (n) :đại dương - dive (v) :thợ lặn, picture - diver (n):người lặn - invent (v):phát minh,sáng tạo explanation - invention ( n ):sự phát minh - vessel (n ) :tàu /thuyền meaning - explore (v) :thám hiểm meaning - explorer (n) :người thám hiểm - scuba-diving ( n) :lặn có sử dụng bình dưỡng khí meaning

- Check : by matching with its meaning

b, Activity 2 . True/ false predictions - Hang on the poster of statements.

- Have Ss read the statements and predict whether they are true or false.

b, True/ false prediction

3- While-reading: (Practice reading the text to choose true or false statements , correct the false ones)

-TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

- Ask Ss to read the text then do T / F then check their predictions - Ask Ss to correct the wrong ones .

c, True or false? Correct the false ones.

Guessing a- T b- F c- T

82

Listenin Correction g F water T F after the

d- F e- T 4- Post-reading:(Practice how to use modal verbs) - Ask Ss to retell the modal verbs they have learnt.

- Make sure the differences among them - Repeat them all

F T

invention vessel

B4* : Complete the passage : * Modal verbs: - can / can’t : one’s abilities - must / mustn’t : obliged - should (n’t ) / ought (n’t ) : advice * Answers: 1- can 5- can 2- must 6- ought to / should 7- can / should 3- must not 8- should / must 4- should

- Ask Ss to read the passage then fill the blanks using the words above - Ss read the passage then fill the blanks using modal verbs 5.Production - Ask Ss to:

- Learn by heart vocab and get the main idea of the text.

- Do exercise B3,4 in the workbook - Prepare next lesson. Unit 14. Lesson 1.

A1.

TEST 15’: Circle the odd one out:

- Do part B 4 again - Translate into Vietnamese

1.A.tennis

B.volleyball

C.draw

D.baseball

2.A.prefer

B.like

C.love

D.hate

3.A.drama

B.series

C.cartoon

D.before

4.A.enjoy

B.love

C.like

D.interesting

5.A.chicken

B.vegetables

C.beef

D.pork

6.A.must

B.should

C.can

D.play

7.A.cyclist

B.diver

C.swimmer

D.carelessly

8. A.shirt

B.skirt

C.blouse

D.table

9. A.oil

B.plate

C.bowl

D.chopstick

10.A.went

B.came

C.agreed

D.sang

----------THE END---------

KEY: 83

Sentence 1 2 3 4 5

Key C D D D B

Sentence 6 7 8 9 10

Key D D D A C

Kiểm tra ngày 18 tháng 3 năm 2019 ……………………………………………………. …………………………………………………… …………………………………………………….. …………………………………………………….

Week:30 Preparing date: 20/3/19 Period:84 Teaching date:27/3/19 CREATIVE EXPERIENCE ACTIVITIES OUR TRADITONAL DISH (Report the innovative experience) I./. Objectives 84

1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to create a recipe for a favourite dish.

2. Skills: Creative when expressing the product, have know about instruction on cooking a dish with proper English.

3. Attitude: - Be aware of local traditional food and its nutrition.

- Know how to preserve their products - Interested in learning and attending.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, …

- Specilized capacity: develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Love their home, family and country II./.PREPARATION: 1.Teacher: English 6 laptop, projector 2.Students: A0, A4 white papers, hard-edged, color papers, pencils, glues, scissors III./.Procedure III./.Procedure Teacher and students’ activities Contents 5.4.Report and present the recipe for the dish - T-M: Work in group of 6-8 students.

- C: self-learning ability, communication capacity - Q: Love their home, family and country -Display posters on the class wall - Arrange space on the wall for groups or play video clips during break. to display their poster on local traditional food or computer for group to show their video clips for 2 weeks - Arrange time and space for groups to - Present the group result before present their result before class the class + Choose the jury to assess group results + Each group presents their group result - Reports covers following contents: for about 5’ + Name of the food + Ingredients + Steps for cooking + How to service + Question and answer for each group last about 5’ - Ask all the member in each group to report.

- Ask other groups to take notes when 85

listening to reports.

5.5. Assessment - Ask each S to evaluate his/her contribution, share felling working in groups - Let groups cross- evaluate when making present

- Ask Ss to put questions to other groups.

- Feedback and provide correct responses to other groups and teacher.

- Take a critical stance and involve analytical reasoning.

- Interm of products: + Meaning for health or local tradition. + The ingredients needed + Intruction to cook the favourite dish + Make and decorate the recipe of the favourite dish in an innovative way.

- In terms of activities: + There are clear assignments among group members in rearch information to creat the recipe. + Every member could express the meaning of the favourite food for health and local tradition. + There are active discussion and agreement I selecting ? What vocabulary have you need to describle ingredients of cooking? ?Why has your group chosen this food? ? What difficulties have you met? ……………………

- Making arguments and agreements on choosing.

FORM FOR GROUP ASSESSMENT Group: ………………………………………

Class: …………………………………………

Presentation Structure of Presentation/Reporting Discussion/Answer report 4 2 1 0 4 2 1 0 4 2 1 0 4 2 1 0 4 2 1 0 4 2 1 0 4 2 1 0 4 2 1 0 4 2 1 0 4 2 1 0 4 2 1 0 4 2 1 0 (Circle the relevant mark relasted to level of assessment) 6-Production: 86

Total

- Prepare new lesson Week: 30 Period: 85

UNIT 14: FREE TIME FUN Lesson 1 : A1, 2 - TIME FOR TV

Preparation date:22/3/2019 Teaching date : 29/3/2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , students will be able to practice reading skill to choose the best answer and to talk about freetime activities.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.Love family and country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: T’s and sts’ activities 1. Warm up: - Guide Ss to play the game - Ask Ss some questions: + How many people watch TV in their free time? + Do you watch always TV in your free time ? + What is your favorite program?...

The contents *Find someone who Find someone who... plays sports reads books watches TV goes out listen to music

Name

2. Presentation:

-TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible 1.Listen. Then practice with a partner. for yourself and everyone.

- Hang picture of part A1 on the board and set the * Answer key: 87

sence: this is the picture of Hoa's family. Look at Hoa: talk about our day, read and it and guess what they do in their free time? Do play chess they watch TV? Lan: watch TV a. New words: a, Activity 1: Present new words b, Structures - Present new words together (pre) cùng nhau translation cuộc phiêu lưu adventure (n) // cricket (n) con dế picture prefer (v) thích hơn situation, example during (pre) trong luc translation That sounds boring nghe có vẻ buồ translation really (adv) thật sự example guess (v) đoán translation just (adv) chỉ - Check: Rub out and Remember b, Activity 2: Present suggestions.

- Use situations and gives some examples.

- Get Ss repeat form of "Would like".

- Get Ss to work in pairs to pratice the structure.

c, Activity 3: Present: Prefer / like - Read the dialogue fisrt.

- Use the text to present .

- Ask Ss to give the form.

- Get them to give some examples.

* Would like Example: Would you like to have dinner at my house?

I 'd love to.

Would you like + to V (inf)?

Would you like + N? * Answer: + Accept: I' d love to. + Refuse: I'd love to but I don't think I can.

I'm sorry I can't. * Prefer / like Example: They prefer to do watch TV. I like listening to music. * To

prefer to V . like V-ing .

3. Practice: Practice the structure: Would you like...? and “prefer”

-TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

- Read the dialogue again once.

- Guide Ss to read it.

- Get Ss to read the dialogue in pairs - Call some pairs to read the dialogue.

c. Practice. * Listen. Then practice.

88

- Get Ss to reread the dialogue, work in pairs to choose the best answer. * Choose the best answer.

- Get them to compare the answer with each other. a) = C : Lan invites Hoa to...

- eat dinner with her family.

- Get Ss to give out the answer. b) = A :Lan wants Hoa to watch TV...

- Check and correct. dinner.

- before c) = B: Hoa's family doesn't have a TV because...

- her aunt and uncle don't like watching TV. d) = C: Hoa...

- likes spending time with her aunt and uncle. e) =D: Lan's family ... watches TV in the evening.

- always

“Find someone Who” - Give instruction and check.

- Have Ss work in group of 4 to practise the activities.

Find someone who….. …..reads books

Name

- Model first.

T: Do you usually (read books) in your free time?

S: Yes, I am/ No ,I am not

……goes to English club …..Watches TV ……..Play football ……has a picnic …….does homework

4.Further practice - Read the dialogue.

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue in pairs to check their prediction and complete the table.

- Check and correct.

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice the dialogue.

A2. Listen and read. Then practice - Ask Ss to look at the ads again then work in with a partner pairs to make open dialogues by replacing the * Make a similar conversation. underlined parts..

P1: Would you like to go to the movies this week?

P2: That sounds good. What would you like to see?

P1: There is a detective movie on at Fansland Theater.

89

P2: OK. Can you make it on Monday night?

P1: Sorry. I have to go to the stamp club.

How about Tuesday?

P2: No. Sorry. I'm going to see a beautiful summer play with my parents.

And I'm busy on Wednesday, too. Are you free on Thursday?

P1: No. I'm not. What about Friday?

P2: That's OK. 5.Production - Ask Ss to work in groups to make open P1: Fine. Let's go on Friday dialogues. d.Homework - Ask Ss to work in groups of 5 to talk about their - Study new words and structures. activities in their free time.- Ask Ss to: - Do exercises in the workbook ( P Study new words and structures.

87,88) - Do exercises in the workbook ( P 87,88) Ex 1: Check the things you like/don’tlike Ex 1: Check the things you like/don’tlike doing in doing in the evening. Then write full the evening. Then write full sentences. sentences.

Ex2: Complete the dialogues.

Ex2: Complete the dialogues.

-------------------------------o0o-----------------------------Week: 30 Period: 86

UNIT 14 : FREETIME FUN Lesson 2 : A3- TIME FOR TV

Preparation date:23/3/2019 Teaching date : 30/3/2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , students will be able to talk about TV and TV programs.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

Love family and country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: The teacher’s & sts’ activities

The contents

90

1. Warm up: - Hold the game

* Hangman.

TELEVISION

2. Pre- reading:

-TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident - Show the picture + Do you like watching TV ? + What do you like to see? .... a, Activity 1. Present new words - Present some new words by: explanation synonym (= crowd ) picture // translation

A3. Read. TV in Viet Nam

a. New words owner gather inside outside change

(n) (v) (adv) (adv) (v)

nguoi chu tap trung ben trong ben ngoai thay doi

- Check : Rub out and Remember b. Grammar: * The past simple tense. b, Activity 2. Revise the past simple tense - Use situations to present + Did you watch TV last night? + What program did you see?..

- Ask Ss to read the text and give some more Example: They sat and watched TV program. examples They might play with their friends. * Form: S + V2 / Ved - Ask Ss to retell the forms. c, Activity 3. Open â&#x20AC;&#x201C;predictions

c. True or False ?

1. Most people in Viet Nam had a TV set thirty years ago.

2. TV owners were not popular at that time.

3. People always gathered in the TV owners' home.

4. More families have not a TV set today.

5. Neighbors don't know each other as well as they did.

- Ask Ss to read the statements and guess whether they are true or false.

- Get Ssâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; predictions

91

F F T F T

3. While - reading: (Practice reading to get information

-TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

- Ask Ss to read the text in silence and check the statements , then compare with their predictions.

- Get Ss to work in pairs to exchange the answers.

- Check and correct.

- Hang on the poster of the summary with the missing words.

- Have Ss read the text again to complete the summary.

- Ask Ss to share with a partner.

- Check and correct.

- Ask Ss to guess the answers - Ss work in pairs to guess the answers.

d. Complete the summary.

In 1960s, most people in Viet Nam did not have a TV set. The people with TVs were popular. In the evening, the neighbors would gather around the TV. They would stay until the TV programs finished. Viet Nam is different today. More families have a TV set and life is more comfortable. But neighbors don't know each other as well as they did in the past.

4. Post – reading(Practice retelling the text ) e . Retell the text - Ask Ss to retell to text.

- Read the poem.

- Ss listen and mark the stressed words.

- Guide Ss to read.

- Check and correct 5.Production - Ask Ss to: - Remember vocabulary and the past simple tense.

- Do exercises in the workbook. (P 89) Ex 4: Compplete the sentences about TV in Viet Nam many years ago.

4. Play with words.

5. Homework.

- Remember vocabulary and the past simple tense.

- Do exercises in the workbook. (P 89) Ex 4: Compplete the sentences about TV in Viet Nam many years ago.

Kiểm tra ngày 25 tháng 3 năm 2019 ……………………………………………………. ……………………………………………………

Week: 31 Period: 87

UNIT 14: FREETIME FUN Lesson 4: B 1, 2

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge 92

Preparation date:27/3/2019 Teaching date : 3/4/2019

By the end of the lesson , students will be able to practice reading a dialogue ( about TV and TV programs) to answer the questions and to practice listening skill to write the time of TV programs

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

Love family and country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III.Procedure Teacher’s and students’ activities 1. Warm up: - Hold the game

Contents * Complete the network News

TV progams

- Ss play in two teams of boys and girls

2. Pre- reading:

-TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made - Ask some questions: + Do you like watching TV ? + What programs do you like to see? .... a, Activity 1. Present new words - Present some new words by: explanation translation example - Check : Rub out and Remember b, Activity 2. Revise the present simple

B1. Listen. Then practice with a partner.

a. New words sport show (n) : may be : có lẽ cartoon (n): phim hoạt hình plenty of : nhiều weather forecast (n) dự báo thời tiết b, New structures

93

tense: prefer , like - Give examples to present

* Prefer: eg: I prefer taking part in them - Ask Ss to read the text and give some * To prefer + V-ing more examples * Like: - Ask Ss to retell the forms. eg: I like to watch programs about teenager in other countries.

I don't really like watching sport * To like doing / to do something c, Activity 3. Open –predictions d, Listen . True or false?

- Ask Ss to read the statements and guess whether they are true or false.

- Get Ss’ predictions 3. While - reading:

-TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone. a.Activity1.Practice reading to check their prediction.

- Have Ss listen to the dialogue and check their predictions. b.Activitiy2.Practice reading to answer the question.

- Ask Ss to read the questions. Make sure they understand all.

- Ask Ss to read the dialogue in pairs and find the answers to the questions.

- Get Ss to work in pairs to exchange the answers.

- Check and correct.

4. Post - reading:(Practice making similar dialogue ) - Ask Ss to work in pairs to make up similar dialogues.

Pre - listening - Have Ss read the programs in silence.

- Ask Ss to predict the answers.

- Get their predictions While- listening - Have Ss listen twice and write the time of Tv programs - Have Ss listen again to check.

e, Answer a) No, she doesn't because there aren't any good programs for teenagers. b) Ba watches sports shows, cartoons and movies. c) Nga likes to watch programs about teenagers in other countries. d) Because they don't play the kind of music she likes. e) She is going to listen to the radio and may be read a book.

f, Make up similar dialogues

3. B2. Listen. Then write the time of programs.

- Children's program: chương trình thiếu nhi

94

Post - listening - Check and correct Ss’ answers: Ss repeat the listening.

5.Production - Ask Ss to: - Remember vocabulary and the past simple tense.

- Do exercises in the workbook. (P 89) Ex 4: Compplete the sentences about TV in Viet Nam many years ago.

Week: 31 Period: 88

- Early news: bản tin chào buổi sáng.

- Weather forecast: bản tin dự báo thời tiết.

- The world today: thế giới ngày nay.

- Movie: "A Fistful of Dollars": phim truyện "Một nắm đô la " a) Children's program starts at 5. b) Early news is at six c) Weather forecast is at ten past ten d) The world today is at a quarter past six. e) Movie: "A Fistful of Dollars starts at seven.

4. Homework - Remember vocabulary and the past simple tense.

- Do exercises in the workbook. (P 89) Ex 4: Compplete the sentences about TV in Viet Nam many years ago.

UNIT 14 : FREETIME FUN Lesson 5 : B 3, 4

Preparation date: 29/3/2019 Teaching date : 5/4/2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , students will be able to practice reading skill to answer the questions and complete the passage.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.Love family and country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s and students’ activities Content 1. Warm up:

* Hangman.

95

- Hold the game : -Let the sts guess the word:

SINGER AUDIENCE

2. Pre- reading:

-TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Selfmade and confident - Show the picture + Who are they ? + What is the photo about ? .... a, Activity 1. Present new words - Present some new words by: Picture explanation picture picture trasnlation translation explanation picture picture example

B3. Listen and read. Then answer the questions. a. New words audience viewer band singer satellite TV cable TV latest contest contestant TV station import # export perform

(n) (n) (n) (n) (n) (n) (a) (n) (n) (n) (n) (v)

- Check : Rub out and Remember b, Activity 2.Prediction.

- Have the sts read these sentences predict 1/ Pop music, contests, imports are popular TV programs 2/ Teenagers like to listen to classical music 3/ There are contests of knowledge.

4/ The contestants are students, workers, TV viewers...

5/ Imports are very expensive 3. While - reading:

b.Prediction:

-TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Love family, friends and country *Practice reading to check their prediction) -Have the sts read and check their prediction.

Answer: True or false 1.T

96

khán gia Người xem Ban nhạc ca sĩ TH vệ tinh TH cáp mới nhất cuộc thi thí sinh/ng thi đài tr.hình nhập khẩu Biểu diễn

2.F Classical music->latest pop mucsic.

3.T 4.T 5.F expensive- cheap * Read and answer the question.

- Ask Ss to read the text in silence and answer the quesions.

- Have Ss read the questions in silence. Make sure they understand all.

- Get Ss to work in pairs to exchange the answers.

- Check and correct.

b. Answer the questions. a) Teenagers like to hear the latest pop music and see the shows of their favorite artists. b) In contests programs, the contestants are students, workers or family members. c) Imports usually include police and hospital series.

4. Post - reading: - Give the demand of the exercise - Ask Ss to read the words in the box.

3. B4 -Write. Complete the passage. Use the - Ask Ss to work in pairs to complete the words in the box. passage.

Most teenagers around the world watch TV. Many listen to the radio. In a lot of countries, the most popular shows on TV are series. They show ordinary characters and how they live.

Many teenagers like pop music. There are lots of music programs on TV and one satellite TV station only shows pop videos.

In many countries, people can receive satellite - Check and correct.

TV. Often in large cities, cable TV is available.

- Call on some Ss to read the text aloud.

With satellite and cable TV, it's possible to choose from a wide variety of programs.

5.Production - Ask Ss to:

- Learn by heart vocab.

- Write and complete the passage (B4 P.146) - Prepare next lesson. Test 45 mins

week:31 Period:89

V. Homework.

- Remember vocabulary and the past simple tense.

- Do Ex 4: Compplete the sentences about TV in Viet Nam many years ago.

Preparing date: 30/3/19 Teaching date: 6/4/19 written test n0 4

I. OBJECTIVES 97

1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to check themselves and do the tests better 2. Skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing 3. Attitude: - Students should revise the old lessons 4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, capacity to use language - Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: sensitive and responsible II. PREPARATIONS: 1.Teacher: copied papers, laptop 2.Students: pens III. MATRIX: IV. TEST:

PART I : LISTEN 1.Listen to the conversation carefully then decide whether the following sentences are true or false.(1 pt) 1.Lan invites Hoa to eat dinner with her family.

2.They will have dinner at 6.15.

3.Hoa’s family doesn’t have TV because her aunt and uncle don’t like watching T.V. 98

4.Hoa’s family usually reads and sometimes plays tennis after dinner.

2. Listen to the conversation again then choose the best answer(1pt) 5.Lan invites Hoa to eat …………with her family A.breakfast B.dinner C.lunch 6.Lan wants Hoa to watch TV ……..dinner A.before B.after C.during ’ 7.Lan s family ……watches TV in the evening A.never B.sometimes C.always 8.Hoa enjoys ………….

A.News in English B.Series: “the Adventure of the Cricket” C.News PART II: GRAMMAR AND VOCAB 1.Circle the odd one out(1pt) 9. A. baseball B. football C. tennis D. activity 10. A. chicken B. vegetables C. beef D. pork 11. A. carrot B. pea C. cucumber D. dinner 12. A. oil B. plate C. bowl D. chopstick 2. Circle the best option A, B, C or D to complete each of (2pts).

13.Odd one out A. stopped B. wanted C. needed 14.Odd one out A. liked B. washed C. played 15.I don’t like papaya. She doesn’t like papaya, ……………

A. too B. either C. neither 16.He …………. come here last night.

A. doesn’t B. won’t C. wasn’t 17.……………do you play games? – Once per week.

A. How often B. How usually C. How much 18.My mother prefers …………….to cycling A. walks B. walking C. to walk 19.My father ……………a new car two months ago.

A. buys B. buying C. to buy 20.They enjoy ……………the kites in their free time.

A. fly B. flying C. to fly 99

the following sentences

D. heated D. fixed D. so D. didn’t D. How many D. walked D. bought D. flied

PART IV: READ 1. Read the passage, then check true (T) or False (F).(1pt) Uyen had a day to remember last week. She had a Math exam last Friday, so she had to stay up late before to do her exercises. She got up late the next morning. She realized that her alarm clock didn’t go off. As she was leaving home, it started to rain heavily. Uyen tried to run as fast as she could. Suddenly she stumbled over a rock and fell down. Her schoolbag dropped into a pool and everything got wet. The rain stopped as she got to her classroom. Luckily, Uyen had enough time to finish her exam.

21. Uyen finished her Math exam.

22. She was late for her classroom.

23. As she got to her classroom, it still rained heavily.

24. Everything in her schoolbag got wet.

2. Choose correct answer A, B, C, or D to complete the passage ( 1pt) Nowadays, television becomes very …… (25)……... both old and young people enjoy ……..(26)……. it very much. TV programs attract millions of viewers all .……(27)…… the world. In addition to the news, television stations also broadcast many…….(28)…… programs such as sports, music, cartoons, wild life, popular science, reports, contests, movies, etc.

25.A. important B. popular C. expensive D. much 26. A. watch B. watching C. to watch D. watched 27.A. in B. on C. over D. around 28.A. interesting B. boring C. happy D. popular PART IV: WRITE 1.Find the mistakes in these sentences(1pt) 29.My brother doesn’t like durians, and I don’t like them, too.

A B C D 30. Last month Lan was ill so she goes to see the doctor at his office A B C D 31.I don’t know how explain all these things to you now.

A B C D 32.They listened to me careful but they didn’t let me go with them A B C D 2. Write about 40-50 words to talk about What did you eat and drink yesterday?(2pt) These cues will help you For breakfast, I ______________________________________ 100

For lunch, I _________________________________________ For dinner , I ________________________________________ ----------THE END--------V. KEY: 1. 0,25 p for each correct sentences Sentence

Key

Sentence

Key

1 F 17 A 2 F 18 B 3 T 19 D 4 F 20 B 5 B 21 T 6 A 22 T 7 C 23 F 8 B 24 T 9 D 25 B 10 B 26 B 11 D 27 C 12 A 28 A 13 A 29 D 14 C 30 C 15 B 31 B 16 D 32 B WRITE:Write at least 5 sentences about yourself: 0.4 p for each correct sentences (Tape: Unit 14 –A1) (Mã đề 2 – đảo xáo trộn các câu) V. PRODUCTION: - Ask Sts to do the exercises in the exercise book.

- Prepare for the next period.

---------------------- o0o ---------------------

Week: 32 Period: 90

UNIT 15: GOING OUT Lesson 1 : A 1. VIDEO GAMES

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge 101

Preparation date: 3/ 4/2019 Teaching date : 10/4 /2019

-By the end of the lesson , students will be able to practice reading a dialogue ( about video games ) to answer the questions .

-Give the advice and talk about bad effects of the video games.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Activities

Contents

1.Warm up.

I. Warm up.

* Network

* Network video games

- Hold the class to play the game : net work about the entertaiments they often do in the free time.

entertaiments go swimming

2. Presentation; -TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident Activity1 .Questions and answer to lead in the lesson.

- Ask students to look at the picture and ask: + What can you see in the picture? + Are there any amusement centers in your town? + Do you often go to an amusement center? ( If 102

A1. Listen. Then practice with a partner

yes ) + What do you usually do there?

- Ss look at the picture and answer the teacher’s questions.

Activity 2. Present new words picture ttranslation picture / translation // - Check : Rub out and remember.

Activity 3.Present the new structure.

(After sts read the dialogue ) What does Lan say to Nam? * Set the sence :Now you are going to listen to the conversation between Lan and Nam. Nam is going to the amusement center, you listen to it and tell me what he will do there.

Activity 3 . Open prediction - Have students guess Where Nam is goingc and what Nam is going to do there.

a, New words. video games (n): trò chơi điện tử addictive: gây nghiện. arcade: khu vui chơi có mái vòm amusement center ( n) : b.New structure: +Don’t spend too much of your time in the arcade.(Give advice ) +Don’t worry,I won’t (Answer as a promise)

c, Prediction: a. Where is Nam going to do? b. What Nam will do in the amusement center?

3. Practice -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

Activity1 . Practice listening skill - Play the tape, and ask students to listen * Answer : carefully and read in silence while listening. a. He is going to the amusement - Ss listen to conversation between Nga and Nam center and check their prediction. b. He is going to play video games there.

Activity 2. Practice the dialogue - Have Ss practice this dialogue with a partner. d, Practice the dialogue - Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of the class.

- Listen to them carefully and correct their mistakes. c, Activity 3.Practice reading skill to anwser the e, Answer the questions questions - Have Ss read the questions carefully. Make sure c.Once a week.

103

they understand all. d.No, he doesn’t - Ask them to work in pairs to read the dialogue e.He usully stays there for about an again and to find the answers the questions . hour.

- Check and correct ( lucky mumber ) f.Because video games can be addictive g.He will do his homework.

4.Further practice “Mapped dialogue” - Give instruction and check.

- Have Ss work in pairs.

You Your friend Where.........going?

Amusement center What.....do? ...video games.

How often......?

2 / week Don’t spend... video ........... games.

Don’t forget......homework. ..............

e, Discussion +do harm to eyes: làm hại mắt +backache: dau lưng +waste time and money: lãng phí..... +learn worse: học hành sa sút “Mapped dialogue” Example exchange

S1: Where are you going?

S2:I’m going to the amusement center.

S1:What are you going to do?

S2:I’m going to play video games S1:How often do you play?

S2:Twice a week.

S1:Don’t spend too much time on - Have Ss work in pairs to complete the dialogue. palying video games.

S2:Don’t worry, I won’t S1:Don’t foget to do your homework.

S2: No, I won’t

5.Production + Do you often play video games? + When do you play it? + Do you play too much? Why not? + Can video games be harmful?

(Yes, video games can be harmful and addictive if you play too much. But video games help you relax after a hard working day.)

- Ask Ss to work in groups listing the bad effects caused by video games.

104

Home work: - Study new words.

- Talk about the harms and interests of video games.

- Do exercise A1 in the workbook - Translate the dia;ogue inti Vietnamese.

- Prepare next lesson. Unit 15.

- Help the groups if they need, give some words Lesson 2. A2. to help students - Ask Ss to work in pairs to discuss.

- Do exercise A1 in the workbook - Translate the dia;ogue inti Vietnamese.

- Prepare next lesson. Unit 15. Lesson 2. A2.

Week: 32 Period: 91

UNIT 15: GOING OUT Lesson 2 : A2 VIDEO GAMES

Preparation date: 5/4/2019 Teaching date : 12/4/2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , the students will be able to talk about the video games and know the bad effects of it.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: TheT’s & Sts’ Activities Contents I.Warm up.

1.Warm up. “ Brainstorming” - Give instruction and check.

- Have Ss work in teams.

- Ss go to board and write “what do you do in your freetime?”

What do you do in your freetime?

“ Brainstorming”

What do you do in your freetime?

105

Listen to the radio watching TV - Control and praise the winner.

2. Pre- reading.

-TM: Play game, practising -C:Capacity to use language -Q: Love family, friends and country Act1 Present new words: mime translation translation //

Listen to the radio watching TV * Possible.

- Go fishing.

- Go to the movie.

- Play sports.

- ...ect...

III. New words.

- dizzy( a): chóng mặt - play outdoor : chơi ngoài trời - social skills : kỹ năng giao tiếp xã hội

- develop ( v): phát triển - Check : Rub out and Remember.

Act2.Introduce the content of the lesson. * Set the sence:You knew the bad effects on video games if we play too much. Today we continue with this topic. In the reading, the doctor will give you some advice that prevent video games from becoming addictive. In your opinion, what are the advice?

- Get Ss’ predictions.

- Ask Ss to listen to the tape twice and III. Answer the questions answer these questions.

1. Millions of young people play video 1. Who play video games?

2. Where do they play them? games.

3. Should they spend much time on 2. Some play them at home, others play these games? Why not?

4. What does the doctor say? them in arcades.

3. No, they shouldn’t. Because they can become tired or dizzy.

4. This is very bad for children. They should play outdoor and develop their social skills.

3. While – reading(Practice reading to get information) 106

-TM: Practising, discussion group, technical presentâ&#x20AC;Ś.

-C: Co-operation, communication,â&#x20AC;Ś -Q: Self-made and be responsible for yourself and everyone.

IV.Complete the sentences - Ask students to read the text again to check their answers then share with a a, D partner. b, A - Check and correct.

- Ask Ss to read the text again to choose the c, D best answer to complete the sentences. d, B - Ss read the passage and complete it by putting the correct word in the blanks. Then work in pairs to share their ideas.

- Check and correct: Ask Ss to repeat the answers - Ask students to read the reading again and ask the questions: + What are bad effects of video games?

- Bad effects of video games: Tired

;

dizzy;

backache;

waste

time;....

+ What advice about this?

- Advice: Play outdoor; take part in activities with others; develop social skills; be with people of their age......

4. Post - reading.

V. Complete the passage with the Act1.Further reading about the advantages 1. be of the video.

- Have students read the reading in pages 2. have 149. Tell about the aim of this exercise: use the words in the box to complete the 3. is passage.

4. identify - Ask Ss to read the words in the box.

- Ask S to do with a partner to complete the 5. are passage.

6. use - Check and correct.

7. can 8. will 9. buy 107

10.show.

Act2.Practice anwsering about themselves - Ask Ss to talk about themselves by answering the questions: - Ss work in pairs to ask and answer. + What do you usually do in your freetime? + Do often play video games? + What are harmful of playing too much video games? + Do you usually play it? + Are you tired? / dizzy? + In your opinion, what need you do in your freetime?

5.Production - Have Ss discuss about 3 headlines of 3 paragraphs - Leart by heart vocab.

- Do exercise A2,3 in the workbook - Prepare next lesson. Unit 15. Lesson 3

* Discussion

VI. Homework - Do exercises: 2, 3( 94- 95) - Learn by heart all the words.

- Rewrite the advice of the doctor.

Week: 32 Period: 92

Unit 15. going out Lesson 3. b 1,2 going out.

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge 108

Preparation date: 6/4/2019 Teaching date : 13/4/2019

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read for details about life in the city and life in the country.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: The teacher’s and sts’ activities 1. Warm up Brainstorming

Contents I. Warm up Brainstorming * Complete the networks

- Hold the game - Ss go to the board to write as many words as possiple.

city

buildings paddies

country

rice

2. Pre – reading.

-TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

B1. Listen. Then practice with a partner.

Act1.Introduce the lesson.

- Ask Ss to look at the picture in the book. Introduce the new lesson by asking some questions: + Do you live in the city or in the town? + Do you like living the city? Why or why not?

109

+What are differences between city and village?

Act2. Present new words II. New words. translation rest (n): phần còn lại // different (a): khác nhau >< the same example traffic (n): phương tiện giao thông translation quite: khá hate= dislike( v): ghét, không thích translation noise (n): ồn ào ; noisy (a ) // awake (v): thức giấc explanation direction (n): hướng // get used to (v): quen. get used to the noise: keep me awake: - Check : Match the word with its right meaning - Play the tape and ask students to listen it carefully.

- Tell them to repeat while listening.

- Have Ss practice the dialogue in pairs.

III, Practice the dialogue - Call some students on and ask them to read in frond of the class.

- Check and correct their pronunciation.

3. While – reading (Practice reading to answer the question) -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and be responsible for yourself and everyone.

- Have students look at the questions in IV, Answer the questions. the book and ask them to work in pairs a. Hoa goes to the school theater one a to answer these questions. week. The rest of the week she usually - Go around the class and help them if stay at home in the evening. they need. b. No, she doesn’t like the city. c. Before, Hoa lived in a village near Hue. d. She liked living in a village because she knew all the people in her neighborhood; the village was quiet and there was only a little traffic. e. She doesn’t like the city because it is noisy and the roads are busy.

- Check and correct Ss’ answers ( closed f. She hates crossing the road most and open pairs) because bikes, motorbikes and cars 110

come from every direction, and they scare her.

4. Post – reading(Futher talking about advantages and disadvatages of living in the city and country) - Ask students to work in small groups * Write the advantages and disadvantages and list out the advantages and of living in the city and in the village. disadvantages in the city and in the city country village. advantage -good -a little s education traffic -a lot of -fresh air entertainment -quiet disadvant - Crowded - Boring ages -heavy traffic -Few enter -noisy tainment 5.Production V.Homework: Work with a partner. Ask and answer - Learn by heart vocab and structure. the questions.

- Do exercise b1.2 in the workbook + What do you do in the evening?

- Prepare next lesson. Unit 15. Lesson 4. + Do you like the city? Why? Why not? + Do you like the countryside? Why? Why not?

Kiểm tra ngày 8 tháng 4 năm 2019 ……………………………………………………. ……………………………………………………

Week: 33 Period: 93

Unit 15. going out Lesson 4. b. 3 going out.

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge 111

Preparation date: 10/4/2019 Teaching date : 17/4/2019

By the end of the lesson , the students will be able to know more about the city and practice reading a passage and answer the questions.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone. willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: The teacher’s and sts’ activities Contents I. Warm up 1. Warm up - Ask some questions about Hoa. * Chatting Listen to teacher and answer the questions + What does Hoa do in the evening? about Hoa. + Does Hoa like the city? Why not? + What did Lan tell to Hoa? - Lan told that Hoa will get used to the city soon.

2. Pre – reading * Read.

-TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident * Present new words.

II. New words explanation help each other ( v): giúp đỡ lẫn nhau expanation / example together: cùng nhau far too expensive: example translation eat out: ăn ở ngoài - Check : What and Where. socialize:(v): giao tiếp - Ask Ss to guess the answers: III.Guess: + Can you guess will Hoa get used to it Will Hoa used to the city soon? soon? + How did Hoa do?

How did she do?

- Get Ss’ guessing. * Now today we are going to read the text about Hoa and answer the question: What could Hoa do in the 112

city?

3. While - reading -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Be responsible for yourself and everyone.

Act1Read and answer the questions - Ask Ss to read the passage in silence and check their guessing.

- Ask Ss to read the text again and answer these questions about Hoa. + Did Hoa get used to the traffic in the city? + What could Hoa do? + What did Hoa and her friends do when they went out? + Why did Hoa rarely go to see movies or eat out in the evening? + What did she prefer to do? + Did Hoa decide that the city wasn’t so bad after all?

- Check and correct ( closed pairs) Act2.Practice making a list of things Hoa does ) - Ask students to make a list of the things Hoa usually did in the evening, using the simple present tense.

- Ask them to share with a partner.

- Check and correct:Ask them to write on the board and correct each sentence.

IV. Answer the questions about Hoa. 1. Yes, she did 2. She could cross the road and she wasn’t scared.

3. They talked and listened to music or help each other with their homework.

Sometimes they played table tennis together.

4. Because everything was too far expensive 5. She preferred to socialize with her friends 6. Yes, she did.

V.Make a list of the things Hoa usually does in the evening - She usually visits, talks and listens to music.

- She plays table tennis and plays chess with her friends.

- She socializes with her friends.

- She goes to the library and borrows books regularly.

4. Post – reading.(Dicuss to answer VI. Dicussion question) - Ask Ss to work in groups to discuss. + Do you like the city? Why? + Are you scared when you cross the busy road? + What do you usually do in the evening?

-Read the poem, ask Ss to mark 113

stressed words.

- Guide Ss to read.

- Ss listen and repeat.

- Ask Ss to practice in groups.

- Check and correct ( whole class, groups) V.Home work.

5.Production: - Write about you: Do you like the city or - Learn by heart vocab and structure. the countryside? Why? - Do exercise B3,4 in the workbook - Prepare next lesson.

-------------------------------o0o------------------------------

Week: 33 Period: 94

Unit 15. going out Lesson 5 . B4

I.OBJECTIVES: 114

Preparation date: 12/4/2019 Teaching date : 19/4/2019

1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , the students will be able to practice listening skill to match each name to an activity 2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Contents The teacher’s and sts’ activities 1. Warm up I. Warm up - Ask some questions : + What do you often do in your free * Complete this network. time? + Do you often .....?

- Ask Ss to complete the network. sports and pastimes

listen to music Ask the sts some questions in B2: + What do you do in the evening? + Do you like the city? Why? Why not? + Do you like the countryside? Why? Why not?

2.Pre-listening.

-TM: Discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and be responsible for yourself and everyone II. Work with a partner. Ask and answer Act1.Revive the name of some the questions.

115

activities + What do you do in the evening?

- Show the pictures. + Do you like the city? Why? Why not?

- Ask Ss to talk about the activities in + Do you like the countryside? Why? Why the pictures. not?

Act2.Introduce the situation of the III. Listen. Match each name to an activity listening text. a, Describe the pictures a, play chess b, play table tennis c, listen to music d, go to the movie theater e, play soccer f, eat out.

- Set the sence.

- Ask Ss to predict the answers.

- Get Ss’ predictions.

b, Prediction

3.While–listening.(Practice listening and matching -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Be responsible for yourself and everyone.Love family, friends and country - Have Ss listen to the tape to match c, Listen and match. each name to an activity and check their predictions.

Ba: - Ask Ss to read work in pairs to Hoa: exchange the answers.

Nga: - Have Ss listen again to check.

Nam: Lan: - Check and correct: Ask them to An: repeat the listening.

4. Post –listening.(Practice talking about their pastime activities. d, Discussion - Ask Ss to work in groups to talk about their pastimes activities.

5.Production V. Homework - Ask Ss to: - Do exercises in the workbook (P 97, 98) Do exercises in the workbook (P 97, Ex3: Check how often you do these things in 98) the evening. Then write full sentences.

116

Ex3: Check how often you do these things in the evening. Then write full sentences.

Ex4: Base yourself on the passage in ex3 ( Unit 15B- SS’ book) , write a passage about your evening activities.

Use these guiding questions to help you.

Ex4: Base yourself on the passage in ex3 ( Unit 15B- SS’ book) , write a passage about your evening activities. Use these guiding questions to help you.

---------------------------------------------Week:33 Period:95

Preparing date: 13/4/19 Teaching date:20/4/19 FEEDBACK ON TEST 45’

I./. OBJECTIVES: 1. Knowledge: After getting back the test papers, students will be able to evaluate their knowledge and have a plan for the next time 2. Skills: To correct Ss’ errors if necessary 3. Attitude: - To give Ss the motivation to learn hard for their exam - Students know how to learn English in right way.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.Love family and country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II./.PREPARATION: 1.Teacher: test 45’ 2.Students: notebooks III./.PROCEDURE: 1- Warm up - How are you today?

- Are you ready for getting back the test papers?

2- Teacher's idea * Priority: - Ss do the part " choose the best answer " and writing well.

- Ss try their best to get good marks.

- Ss know how to do the test, present well, true request.

- Ss understand vocabularies, language focus. *Defect: - Some Ss have many mistakes about using vocabularies.

- Some Ss have many mistakes about writing sentences, using structure.

117

- Some Ss have many mistakes about showing.

- Some Ss copy other exams 3- Pay the test paper back to ss - Ss look at the tests and do the tests again by themselves.

- Ss find their mistakes by themselves.

- Ss share and compare with a partners.

-T asks Ss to work in pairs +S1 corrects mistakes of S2's test + S2 corrects mistakes of S1's test - T calls - Ss answer one by one 4- T gives ss the answer key -T: Gives the aims of the exercise from the test.

-Ss: Listen -T: Asks Ss to give the answers they did.

-Ss: Give the answers they did or write on board -T: Gives the correct answers.

-Ss: Listen and correct the mistakes -T: Explains some knowledge and the answers Key: 0,25 p for each correct sentences Sentence

Key

Sentence

Key

1 F 17 A 2 F 18 B 3 T 19 D 4 F 20 B 5 B 21 T 6 A 22 T 7 C 23 F 8 B 24 T 9 D 25 B 10 B 26 B 11 D 27 C 12 A 28 A 13 A 29 D 14 C 30 C 15 B 31 B 16 D 32 B WRITE:.Write at least 5 sentences about yourself: 0.4 p for each correct sentences (Tape: Unit 14 â&#x20AC;&#x201C;A1) - Spend time with students to ask questions about their tests, their points.

- T asks Ss write key in notebook and correct their mistakes by themselves.

118

5-Production: - Redo the test in the notebook - Prepare new lesson ----------------------@0@------------------Kiểm tra ngày tháng 4 năm 2019 ……………………………………………………. …………………………………………………… …………………………………………………….. …………………………………………………….

Week: 34 Period: 96

UNIT 16: PEOPLE AND PLACES Lesson 1 : A 1,2. FAMOUS PLACES IN ASIA 119

Preparation date:17/4/2019 Teaching date : 24/4/2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , the students will be able to practice speaking and reading skills to name countries and their capital cities to know some famous places in Asia.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

Love country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: The teacher’s and sts’ activities Contents 1.Warm up I. Warm up Complete the table. Use the names of Complete the table. Use the names of the the countries in the box. countries in the box.

Capital Country - Ask Ss to complete the table.

Bangkok - Ask Ss to work in pairs to share with a Beijing partner.

Kuala Lumpur Phnom Penh Vientian Yangon - Check and correct.

Jakarta 2 Pre – reading -TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident - Ask students to look at the postcard and the sentence in it: Greetings from Bangkok!

II. Listen. Then practice with a partner. + Where is Bangkok?

- In Thailand. + What do you know about Thailand?

- Thailand is a country in Asia. It is ..

120

a, Activity 1. Present new words.

III.New words album (n) :quyển an -bom region (n): vùng ,miền occasionally (adv) : thỉnh thoảng as well as ( adv)

picture translation // // - Check : What and Where.

IV.Answer the questions. b, Activity 2 . Open prection - Set the sences: Now you are going to listen a conversation between Hoa and Ba What does Mr. Nghia do?

- He is a pilot. and answer these questions .

Where did he send this postcard?

- Get Ss’ predictions.

- Bangkok Which places does Ba’s uncle fly to?

- He flies to Bangkok, Hong Kong, Kuala Lumpur, Singapore, Jakarta, Phnom Penh, Vientian, Yangon 3. While - reading Practice reading a dialogue to answer the questions and match the half- sentences.

-TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

- Play the tape and ask students to name places that are in the tape.

- Have Ss listen again and answer the questions .

-Have students practice the dialogue in pairs.

- Check and correct their answers.

- Then ask students to match the halfV.Match the half - sentences. sentences - Ss work in pairs to match A. see th stamps.

- Check and correct : Ask Ss to read full a) Ba’s uncle is b) Uncle Nghia sent B. as well as the sentences. stamps postcards c) Ba keeps the postcards C. in a special book. d) Ba puts the stamps D. a pilot. e) Hoa wants to E. many different places.

121

f) Ba and Hoawould like the to visit visits.

F. to Ba from cities he

4.Post – reading.(Practice asking and e, Now ask and answer questions with a answering about Ba’s uncle ) partner.

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to ask and S1: Where does Ba’s uncle fly to? answer.

S2: He usually flies to ...........

S1: Where is that?

- Check and correct ( closed pairs) S2: It’s in ......................

- Do exercises in the workbook ( P99, 100) Ex1:Look at the map. Match each letter to the name of a city in the box. Then complete the table.

Ex2: Complete the sentences. Use the map and the table in the exercise 1 to help you.

5.Production Noughts and crosses - Have Ss work in 2 teams - Ask Ss make complete senences with the simple present tense with adv eg: He often flies to Bangkok He / fly / I / not travel She / go / Bangkok / Singapore PhnomPenh They / send You / visit / He / fly / poscards / Beijing HongKong Jakata They fly / He / go / She / travel / Kuala Vientiane Philipine Lumpur

Week: 34 Period: 97

Preparation date: 19/4/2019 UNIT 16: PEOPLE AND PLACES Lesson 2 : A 3, 4. FAMOUS PLACES IN Teaching date : 26/4 2019 ASIA 122

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , the students will be able to pracice listening skill for some specific information and reading skill about some attractions in South-east Asia.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

Love country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: The teacher’s and sts’ activities 1.Warm-up : * Shark attack - Hold the game. + Angkor Wat is one of the ................. in South-east Asia 2. Pre-listening : -TM: Play game, practising -C: Co-operation -Q: Self-made be responsible for yourself and everyone + Tell me some places in the Southeast Asia you know that have airports .

- Introduce the island Bali in the tape - Ask Ss to guess about those places - Get their predictions.

Contents I.Warm-up : * Shark attack : D E S T I N A T I O N S

II. A 3 : Listen and complete this pilot’s schedule - Bangkok , Singapore , Jakarta , Hanoi ,....

- Bali is a famous island in the South-west Indonesia.

III. Prediction. * Answers Prediction Mon Tue 123

Answers Bangkok and Singapore

Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun

Singapore Jakarta Bali Bali Hongkong back to Hanoi

3 While-listening : -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

- Play the tape - Ask Ss to complete the poster .

- Play the sencond time - Ask Ss to share with their partner IV. A4: Listen and read then answer the questions 4.Post- listening : - Ask Ss to go to the board then complete the table - Have Ss listen again and check : Retell the passage : On Monday, he flew to Bangkok and then to Singapore. He stayed in a hotel ....

Pre-reading : a, Activity 1. Present some new words a, New words.

- The film attracts many people ( - attract ( v ) :hấp dẫn Many people like it ) example meaning - attraction (n ) :sự hấp dẫn meaning - ancient monument (n) tượng đài cổ xưa meaning - Buddhist temple (n) : ngôi chùa meaning - culture (n ) : văn hóa meaning - shadow puppet show (n) : biểu diễn múa - Check : Matching with meaning in rối bóng Vietnamese - colorful coral (n) san hô màu b, Activity 2 . True or False b, True or false statements. statements.

1. There are many anciant monuments - Hang on the poster of statements. in South- east Asia.

- Ask Ss to guess if the statements are 2. You can see colorful dances in true or false.

Indonesia.

3. You can see shadow pupet shows in Indonesia.

4. You can listen to and enjoy 124

While-reading : - Play the tape - Ss listen to the tape and check their predictions.

- Show out the fisrt question in studentsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; book.

- Have Ss read the text in silence to answer the question .

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to ask and answer.

- Correct their answer

Post- reading : - Ask Ss to work in groups of 4 to discuss the second question .

- Help Ss if necessary.

5.Production - Learn by heart vocab and structure.

- Do exerciese in workbook.

- Prepare next lesson. Unit 16. Lesson 3. B1

Week: 34 Period: 98

traditional music during these shows.

5. There are a lot of resorts in South â&#x20AC;&#x201C; east Asia. c, Answer the questions . a) The passage mentions three kinds of tourist attractions . What are they ?

- The three kinds of attractions menetioned in the passage are : ancient monuments , shows and resorts b) What kinds of attractions do you prefer ?

- I prefer .....

- You may prefer ... ( Find more attractions in South-east Asia ).

- Do exercises in the workbook.( P 100, 101) Ex3: Make up question. Then write the answers.

Ex4: Check the right column. Then write full sentences.

Preparation date: 20/4/2019 Unit 16. people and places Lesson 3. b.(1-2) famous people. Teaching date : 27/4/2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 125

1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know more about a famous person and a historic place.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

Love country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Activities 1.Warm up.

I.Warm up.

“Matching” - Give instruction and check.

- Have Ss play in teams.

Historic places Bach Dang river Hoan Kiem lake Kim Lien village Dong Da Dien Bien Phu

Contents

Famous people QuangTrung Vo Nguyen Giap Ngo Quyen Ho Chi Minh Le Loi

2, Pre-reading : -TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident - Show the picture of General Vo Nguyen Giap. + Who is this ? + What do you know about him? + What’s he famous for? ...... a, Activity 1. Present new words.

“Matching” * Answers: Bach Dang river – Ngo Quyen Hoan Kiem lake - Le Loi Kim Lien village - Ho Chi Minh Dong Da – QuangTrung Dien Bien Phu - Vo Nguyen Giap

B1 : Listen . Then practice with a partner.

I

II. New words. quiz ( n):câu đố 126

example example translation // // - Check : What and Where. b, Activity 2. True / False Prediction - Hang on the poster of statements.

- Ask Ss to guess if the statements are true or false.

- Get Ss’ guessing.

3, While-reading : -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

- Play the tape - Ask Ss to listen and repeat.

- Play the sencond time - Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice the dialogue with a partner.

- Call on some pairs to demonstrate before class - Ask Ss to work in pairs to check the statements and compare with their guessing.

- Ask Ss to corrcet the false ones.

4.Post- reading : - Ask Ss to go to the board then complete the table - Have Ss listen again and check : Retell the passage : On Monday, he flew to Bangkok and then to Singapore. He stayed in a hotel ....

famous (a)nổi tiếng fame (n) The People’s Army of Viet Nam:quân đội NDVN force (n) : lực lượng defeat (v): đánh thắng ,đánh bại

IV.True or False ?

1. Liz knows a lot about General Giap.

2. The People’s Army of Viet Nam defeated the French in 1956.

3. The People’s Army of Viet Nam won the battle of Dien Bien Phu. 4. General Hiap was born in 1920.

5. Ba does likes history.

6. Liz will lend Ba some history books

V. Practice the dialogue.

* Answers: 1. F. Liz knows nothing about General Giap 2. F. The People’s Army of Viet Nam defeated the French in 1954 3. T 4. F. General Hiap was born in 1911.

5. T 6. F. Ba will lend Liz some history books. * Retell :

127

B. Speak: Pre - speaking - Have Ss read the dialogue with the missing words in silence.

- Ask Ss to read the words in the box.

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to complete it.

- Check and correct ( closed pairs) - Have Ss practice the dialogue.

While â&#x20AC;&#x201C; speaking.

- Have Ss read the adjectives in the box.

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to make their own dialogues about famous people they know using the adjectives in the box.

- Use mapped dialogue to help Ss to practice.

VI.B2. Practice. a, Complete this dialogue with the words in the box. Then practice with a partner.

b, Now make your own diaolgues about famous people you know.

* Mapped dialogue.

- Do you like......?

- Ss work in pairs to make their own dialogues.

Post â&#x20AC;&#x201C; speaking.

- Check and correct : Call on some pairs to demonstrate in front of the class.

5.Production - Ask Ss to : - Do exercises in the workbook.( P 100, 101) Ex3: Make up question. Then write the answers.

Ex4: Check the right column. Then write full

Week: 36 Period: 99

- No, not very much.

I prefer..............

- Why ?

- Because he is ........

- I hope (not) so

- What about you ?

- My favorite .....

- Really ?

- Yes, I think he

VII.Homework - Do exercises in the workbook.( P 100, 101) Ex3: Make up question. Then write the answers.

Ex4: Check the right column. Then write full sentences.

Unit 16. people and places Lesson 4. b.(4) famous people.

128

Preparation date: 1/5/2019 Teaching date : 8/5/2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read for details about famous people and talking about their biographies.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Activities Contents I. Warm-up : “Guessing game I. Warm-up : - Hold the game. * Guessing game : T: I’m thinking of a famous writer.

A: Do you like…………….?

- Ss guess the words.

B: No. A: Do you like ....................?

“Guessing game” B: Yes. - Have Ss talk about famous people in the world eg: Pele, Shakespeare, Elizabeth.......

- Ask Ss to write his / her favorite person in a small piece of paper and keep it secret.

“My favorite person is..............”

- Ask Ss to play game - Control and get feedback.

2. Pre – reading.

-TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone B4. Read. Famous People II, New words.

*Activity 1. Present new words. translation realia

invent (v) 129

translation picture examples translation example example

- Check : Match the word with the right meaning. *Activity 2. Revise the past simple tense.

- Ask Ss to talk about what they did yesterday.

- Have them retell the form

inventor ( n) invention (n) electric light bulb (n) establish (v) gramophone (n) author (n) grow – grew (v) actor (n) fairy tales (n)

III, The past simple tense eg: Yesterday, I watched TV. ..................................

Form : (+) S + V- ed (- ) S + didn’t + V(inf) (? ) Did + S + V(inf) ?

3.While-reading : -TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Be responsible for yourself and everyone.

IV, Answer the questions.

- Have Ss read the text in silence to find the 1. When was Thomas Edison answers to the questions. born?

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to share the 2. Where was he born? answers.

3. What was his most famous - Check and correct. invention?

4. Did he invent the gramophone?

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to play roles to ask 5. What was Hans Christian and answer Andersen nationality?

- Check and correct.

6. When was he born?

7. What did he do?

8. What did he become most famous for?

4, Post- reading : V, Ask and answer to make an - Ask Ss to work in groups to talk about interview. famous people they know.

- Help if necessary.

S1: Where were you born, Mr. - Check and correct.

Edison?

S2: I was born on America.

S1: When were you born?

S2: I was born in 1847 130

......................

VI.Home work: - Do exercises in the workbook.( P 102, 103) Ex4: Check the things you think Anderson did and write the thingd you think he din’t do - Prepare the next lesson: LF 5 -------------------------------o0o----------------------------

5.Production - Ask Ss to : - Do exercises in the workbook.( P 102, 103) Ex4: Check the things you think Anderson did and write the thingd you think he din’t do - Prepare the next lesson: LF 5

Week: 36 Period: 100

Unit 16. people and places Lesson 5. b.(5) famous people.

Preparation date: 3 /5/2019 Teaching date : 10 /5/2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to listen for details about Uncle Ho’s biography with sequence of the past tense.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.Love country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s & sts’ activities Contents 1.Warm up.

I.Warm up. “ Nought and crosses” “ Nought and crosses” - Give some verbs and ask Ss to give the past of the verbs and make sentences with know go work them become write invent grow bring be - Have Ss work in 2 teams * Example: know – knew 131

I knew her address know go work become write invent grow bring be 2, Pre – listening.

-TM: Play game, practising -C: Capacity to use language -Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible II.Vocab. for yourself and everyone -Elicit the words from Ss. - (to) leave: roi - (to) move: chuyen - (to) find – found: tim thay - (to) form: thanh lap * Checking: rub out and remember - Ask some questions about Uncle Ho + When was he born? Where? + When did he leave VietNam?.....

- Have Ss look at the table and predict the answers.

- Get their predictions.

III.Prediction.

- Set the scene: Uncle Ho travelled to many places in the world.

- Ask Ss to predict the places where Uncle Ho traveled.

Places where Uncle Ho traveled Africa Paris * Answers: Africa, England, America, London, Paris, Moscow, Guang zhou, China.

3, While- listening -TM: Practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone - Have Ss listen to the tape and check their predictions.

- Have Ss listen again and complete the IV. Listen. Complete the table. table.

Year Place Uncle Ho Year Places Date of birth 1890 Kim Lien Date of birth 1890 Kim Lien Left Viet Nam Left VN 1911 Africa, England 132

Worked in a hotel Went to another country Moved again Founded Vietnamese Communist Party Formed Viet Minh Front Became President Died

1900s 1923 1930

Moscow

Viet Nam

4, Post – listening.

“Write it up” - Ask Ss to use the table above to write a paragraph about Uncle Ho, using the verbs in the past Eg: Uncle Ho was born in 1890 in Nghe An

5.Production : - Ask Ss to : Do exercises in the workbook.( P 102, 103) Ex1: Write the past tense of these verbs.

Ex2: Complete the story about Marie Curie.

Ex3: Make up questions to answer about Marie Curie.

Week: 36 Period: 101 I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge

America Worked in hotel 1900s London Went to another Paris 1917 country Moved again 1923 Moscow Founded Vietnamese Guangzhou 1930 Communist Party Formed Viet Minh VN 1941 Front Became President 1945 VN Died 1969 Hanoi

“Write it up” Example: Uncle Ho was born in 1890 in Nghe An. He left Vietnam in 1911 and traveled to Africa, England and Amecica. After this, he worked in hotel in London in 1900s, then went to Paris in 1917 and then moved to Moscow.

He founded Vietnamese Communist Party in 1930 in Guangzhou. He formed the Viet Minh Front in 1941. he became president of Vietnam in 1945.

Uncle Ho died in Hanoi in 1969. he will always be rememberd by the Vietnamese people. *Homework - Do exercises in the workbook.( P 102, 103) Ex1: Write the past tense of these verbs.

Ex2: Complete the story about Marie Curie.

Ex3: Make up questions to answer about Marie Curie.

LANGUAGE FOCUS 5

133

Preparation date: 4 / 5/2019 Teaching date : 11 /5/2019

By the end of the lesson , students will be able to revise tenses of verbs ; modal verbs ; adjectives and adverbs ; how to expressing like , dislike and prefer ; Why – Because.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s activities 1. Warm-up : - Do an example - Ss pratice speaking to make meaningful sentences - Notice the verb form in each sentence - Ask Ss to give their remark in each of these sentences 2. Presentation -TM:Discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made a, Avtivity 1.Revise tenses of verbs + Can you tell me how to recognize the Present simple tense ? + Which adverbs of time do they go with ? + Can you tell me the form ? + Can you give examples ?

- Ask Ss to copy + Can you tell me how to recognize the tense ?

Students’ activities I.Warm-up * Play a game of verb tense Ex:I often play video games in my free time .

He ....

They ...

Now , I .....

Yesterday , I ...

He ....

He ...

They ..

They ....

Tommorow, I .....

II. Tenses of verbs: 1- The simple present tense : - always ... never - everyday / week / month / once / 6 days a week - in the morning / afternoon / evening / in my free time .

Form (+) S + V ( He / She / It + V-s/es ) (- ) S + do / does + V (inf) (? ) Do / Does + S + V (inf) ? eg: Every day I go to shool by bike.

2- The present progressive : 134

+Which adverbs of time do they go with ? + Can you tell me the form ? + Can you give examples ?

- Ask Ss to copy + Can you tell me how to recognize the tense ? + Which adverbs of time do they go with ? + Can you tell me the form ? + Can you give examples ?

- Ask Ss to copy + Can you tell me how to recognize the tense ? + Which adverbs of time do they go with ? + Can you tell me the form ? + Can you give examples ?

b, Activity 2 . Revise modal verbs - Ask Ss to retell modal verbs.

- Ask them to give examples c, Activity 3 . Revise adjectives and adverbs + How to form an adv from an adj ? + Can you give examples

d, Activity 4 . Revise “likes” ; “dislikes” and “ prefer”.

- Ask Ss to give examples - Let them copy

- now= at the moment = at present = right now - It’s 8 o’clock / Imperative : Look ! / Listen ! ...

Form:(+) S + am / is / are + V-ing (- ) S + am / is / are + V-ing (? ) Am / is / are + S + V ? eg: We are learning English at the monent.

3- The simple past tense : - This morning / yesterday / last week / month / year ..

- ago / in 2000 Form: (+) S + V-ed (- ) S + did + V (inf) (? ) Did + S + V (inf) ? eg: Yesterday I went to the dentist.

4- The simple future tense : - This evening / tonight - tommorow / next week / in 2011 Form (+) S + will + V( inf) (- ) S + will not + V (inf) (? ) Will + S + V (inf) ? eg: They will have a party this Sunday.

III. Modal verbs eg: You ought to go to the doctor.

Can I go to the movies ?

Modal verb+ V inf IV. Adjectives and adverbs Adjective –ly ------> Adverb bad badly quick quickly ....... ........

Note: good well fast fast hard hard eg: He is a quick runner-> He runs quickly V. Expressing likes ; dislikes and prefer eg: + What would you like to eat?

- I ‘d like some noodles. + Do you like cooking ?

- No, I don’t really like it. + I prefer the mountain to the sea. + I prefer watching TV to reading books 135

e, Activity 4 . Revise Why - Because - Ask Ss to give examples - Let them copy

VI. Why........? - Because.....

- Red. eg: What is your favorite sport ?

Why ?

- Because it is very lucky.

3. Practice -TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone a, Activity 1: Practice tenses of verbs - Ask Ss to read the sentences and check the correct column.

- Have Ss work in pairs to exchange the answers.

- Check and correct.

b, Activity 2: Practice modal verbs - Ask Ss to work in pairs to do.

- Check and correct.( closed pairs)

VII. Exercises 1. Read the sentences. Check the correct column.

Past Presen Futur e t

a, I live in Ho Chi Minh City. b, Ba is practicing the guitar. c, Hoa went to the doctor. d, Q T school will hold it’s anniversarycelebration on March 23. e, Nam ate too much cake at the birthday party. f, It is a beautiful day. g, Hoa is riding her bike to school. h, The basketball game started at 3.30 pm. i, I am very happy. j, It will be cool and cloudy.

2. Modal verbs. a, Work with a partner. Read the dialogue. b, Make up similar dialogues. * Answers:a, Can I play soccer, Mom? First you must practice the piano. b, Can I play badminton, Mom? 136

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to do.

- Check and correct.( closed pairs

c, Activity 3: Practice Adjectives and adverbs.

- Have Ss read and check the box.

- Ask Ss to work in pairs to complete the sentences.

- Check and correct.

4.Further practice

3. Adjectives and adverbs. a, Check the correct box.

Adjectiv e

dangerous slowly skillfully

good

bad quickly

d, Activity 4: Practice likes and dislikes.

- Ask Ss to read menu and the prompts.

- Have them to work in pairs to express like or dislike 5.Production - Ask Ss to:Revise the structures and vocabulary they have learnt.

Week: 37 Period: 102 I.OBJECTIVES:

First you must clean up your room c, Can I go fishing, Mom? First you must post this letter. d, Can I watch TV, Mom? First you must go to the market. e, Can I go roller - skating, Mom? First you must go to the library. c, Use should or shouldn’t to give Hoa some advice a, You should go to the doctor. b, You ought to drink some water. c, ........Ss’ answers

Adverb

b, Complete the sentences.

A. quickly B. slowly C. good D. dangerous skillful VIII. Expressing likes and dislikes.

S1: What would you like to eat?

S2: I ‘d like some soup.

REVISION

137

Preparation date : Teaching date :

E.

8 /5/2019 15 /5/2019

1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , students will be able to revise tenses of verbs ; modal verbs ; adjectives and adverbs ; how to expressing like , dislike and prefer ; Why – Because.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.Love family and country, willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: Teacher’s activities 1. Warm-up : - Ask Ss to add as many words as posiple

Students’ activities

2. Presentation.

-TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Love family, friends and country I. Vocabulary.

- Health and hygiene: toothache,........

- Food and drink : - Freetimes activities: - Famous people and places:

a, Avtivity 1. Revise the question and answer about the price - Ask Ss to look at the item column and the price

II. Grammar 1- How much is it ?

A : How much is the green dress ?

B : It’s 30,000 dong A : What about the violet one ?

138

- Give example clearly - Ss replace words to make similar dialogues

B : It’s 35 , 000 dong

b, Activity 2 . Practice the prepositions of position .

- Ask Ss to retell prepositions of position - Ask Ss to repeat some places - Ask Ss to look at the map and ask and answer about the position of some places - Guide Ss to look at the street map to ask and answer.

- Ss play role to practice speaking

2- Prepositions of position :

g, Activity 7 . Revise adverbs of

7. Adverbs of frequency 139

- next to = beside - to the left >< to the right - between / opposite ... * Practice speaking about places - Shoe store , hairdressser’s , restaurant , library , minimart , park ...

Eg: S1: Where is the clothing store ?

S2: It is on Hai Ba Trung Street . It is near the shoe store to the right c, Activity 3 . Revise the question and 3- Ask and answer about distance Eg : How far is it from Co Phuc town to Yen answer about distance .

- Give example Bai city?

- Ask Ss to look at the table and make - It’s about ten kilometers. questions and answer * How far is it from A to B ?

- It is about ... ( 800 meters ) 4. Too, so, either, neither d, Activity 4 . Revise too, so, either, eg: I like pork. neither.

- Ask Ss to give examples I like pork , too / I do, too. / So do I I don’t like fish.

I don’t like fish, either. / I don’t, either. / Neither do I 5. Indefinite quantifiers: a little, a lot / lots e, Activity 5 . Revise Indefinite of, too much , too many, a few, much, many quantifiers: a little, a lot / lots of, too much , too many, a few, much, many eg: - Ask Ss to retell indefinite quantifiers.

Let’s buy a little food - Ask them to give examples.

Don’t eat too much candy. .............................

6. More, less and fewer f, Activity 6 . Revise more, less and eg: fewer.

- Ask Ss to retell adverbs of frequency.

He works more hours than Tim’s father.

- Ask them to give examples.

Mr. Hai Produces less rice than Mr. Toan There are fewer eggs than in the morning.

eg: frequency He occasionally flies to Hong Kong - Ask Ss to retell adverbs of frequency.

- Ask them to give examples.

It is usually hot in summer.

3.Practice.

-TM: Play game, practising, discussion group, technical present….

-C: Co-operation, communication,…

-Q: Love family, friends and country -Have the sts do the exercise.

-Let the sts do the exercise individually.

-Call the sts to do the exercise on the bb -Give the sts correct answers.

5.Production.

Recall all the structure that ps have learnt.

III.Exercise : 1. Liz went to the supermarket ____ .

A. now B. yesterday C. tomorrowD. tonight 2. Her mother ____ a new dress for her 2 days ago.

A. buy B. buys C. will buy D. bought 3. What time ____ you go to bed last night?

A. were B. do C. did D. will 4. What was wrong ____ her?

A. to B. of C. for D. with 5. We went to a foodstall ____ dinner.

A. to B. for C. at D. in 6. ___does Minh’s tooth hurt? -Because he has a cavity.

A. What B. Who C. Why D. Where 7. Nam was scared ___ seeing the dentist.

A. of B. to C. for D. in 8. Hoa should go to the dentist. She has a __ A. cavity B. Cold C. headache D. stomachache 9. What’s his ________? -He is 41 kilos.

A. height B. tall C. heavy D. weight 10. Lan has two books. Hoa has three books.

Lan has ___books than Hoa. A. few B. less C. more D. fewer V.Home work: - Revise the structures and vocabulary they have learnt.

-------------------------------o0o-----------------------------140

Week: 37 REVISION Preparation date: 10 /5/2019 Period: 103 Teaching date : 17 /5/2019 I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge By the end of the lesson , students will be able to revise tenses of verbs ; modal verbs ; adjectives and adverbs ; how to expressing like , dislike and prefer ; Why – Because.

2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Self-made and confident, be responsible for yourself and everyone.

II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. PROCEDURES: 1) The simple present tense: a) Form: (+) I (you,we, they ) + V. She (he, it, Tom ) + Vs(es) (- ) I ( you,we, they ) + don’t + V She ( he, it Tom ) + doesn’t + V. (?) Do I (you, we, they ) + V…?

Does She ( he, we, they ) + V…?

Wh- question +do/ does +S + V…? b) Uses: Expreses an action often happens everyday. c) Adverbs: Usually, sometimes, often, always, never, everyday (week, month,year…)

Eg: He always practises English in the evening.

2) The simple progressive tense: a) Form: (+) S + am/ is/ are + V-ing.

(-) S + am not/ isn’t/ aren’t + V-ing. (?) Am/ Is/ Are + S + V-ing.

Wh- question + am/ is/ are + S + V-ing? b) Uses: Express an action happen at the present. c) Adverbs: Now, at present, at the moment, right now.

Eg: They are playing soccer now.

3) The near future tense: 141

a) Form: (+) S + am/ is/ are + going to + V (-) S + am not/ isn’t/ aren’t + goingto+V (?) Am/ is/ are + S + going to + V…?

Wh- question + am/ is/ are + S + going to + V ? b) Uses: Express an action certain happen in the future. c) Adverbs: tomorrow; tonight; next week ( month, year, Sunday…)

Eg: He is going to visit Ha Long next Sunday.

4) The future simple tense: (+) S + will + V (-) S + will not (won’t) + V (?) Will + S + V? Wh-question + will + S + V? Advs: tomorrow, tonight, next ( week, month, year…), Ex 1: Use correct tense 1. Trung (go)………. to the amusement center twice a week. He (like)………….. (play)……………. Electronic games very much. At the moment he ( play)…………. A new game there.

2. Nga gets used to ( stay)…………….. up late.

3. My father usually (drink)…….. coffee but today he (drink)……. Tea. 4. Last Sunday Minh ( read)…………….. books in the library. He (be) ……………… there for three hours.

5. They ( introduce)…………….. a new video game next month. * Grammar structures: 6. 1) There is/ are + singular/ plural noun.

7. 2) S + Modal verbs + V. 8. Eg: 9. - He must go to class in time.

10.- We can speak English.

11.- He could explore the oceans of the world.

12.- I ought to finish it.

13.- I should clean my room.

14.3) How many + cout. noun +do / does + S +want?

15.4) How much + uncount. noun + do/ does + S + want ?

16.- How much + be + S? S + be + price.

17.5)*, Prefer something to something: thich … hơn 18.- He prefers orange juice to lemon juice.

19.*, Prefer Ving to Ving: thich làm cái này hơn cái kia.

20.- He prefers watching T.V to reading.

21.*, Prefer + to inf: thích làm gì hơn 22.6) How long + be + S + going to visit?

23. - For + time.

24.7) How do/ does + S + V? By …

25.8) When is your birthday ?

142

26.It’s on…

27.9) Comparatives and superlatives: 28._ Comparatives: 29. S1 + be + short adj- er + than + S2.

30._ Superlatives: 31. S + be + the + short adj – est.

32.- Some special adjectives: Adjectives Comparative Superlative the best Good/ well better worse the worst Bad Litlle less the least the most Many/much more Far farther/ thefarthest/ further furthest 33.10) More, less and fewer 34.- Do you work fewer hours than Hoa? 35.- I feel less scared now.

36.- Dad plays more golf.

37.11) a little, a lot/lots of, too much 38.- Let’s buy a liitle food.

39.- Hoa has lots of friends in Hue. 40.- Her new school has a lot of students.

41.- You work too much.

42.- Don’t eat too much candy.

43.- I’m sure we’ll have lots of fun.

44.12) So, too, either, neither 45.- I’m in class 7A. 46. So am I. / I’m too.

47.- I hate carrots.

48. And I don’t like peas, either.

49.- I don’t like them.

50. Neither do I

143

Week: 37 Period: 104

THE SECOND EXAM Time : 45 minutes

Preparation date: 10 /4/2019 Teaching date : /4/2019

I.OBJECTIVES: 1.Knowledge -At the end of the lesson sts can achieve these results: +Reading :Read a text about popular activities people do in their free time and do the exercise: true/false and answer the questions. +Language focus and vocabulary:check the sts’s knowledge about :Tenses of verbs Modal verbs,Adjectives and adverbs,Too, so, either and neither. +Writing: Rewrite the sentences, begining as shown, so that the meaning stays the same Students will be able to do the test well . 70% satisfactory up 2.Skill: Listening ,speaking ,reading ,writing 3. Attitude: - Positive about their lesson.

- Students know how to learn English in right way.

- Ss are interested in doing exercises.

4. Competence and quality: 4.1. Competence: - General capacity:self-learning ability, communication capacity, capacity to use language, cooperation capacity,…

- Specilized capacity:English language ability, develop self capacity,..

4.2. Quality: Willing to participate in social activities, live humanty, cooperate with people around,…

3.Attitudes: Students love more lesson 4.Competence: Communication ,language ,write ,speak II. PREPARTION: 1, Teacher's: text book, teacher’s book, sub-boards, pictures, cues .2, Students': text book, note book, chalks, pens III. THE MATRIX:

144

145